Command Line Interface Guide for WCS

Command Line Interface Guide

3HP700021015GUZZA

Revision 3.4Software Release 3.0

Alcatel-Lucent

Copyright 2006 Alcatel-Lucent, Inc.The information contained in this document is subject to change. Changes will occur only in accordance with formal change control procedures.

This document contains proprietary information, which is protected by copyright laws. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language or program language without prior written consent of Alcatel-Lucent, Inc.

Alcatel-Lucent, Inc. has prepared the information contained herein, solely for use by Alcatel-Lucent employees, agents and customers. Dissemination of the information and/or concepts contained herein to other parties is prohibited without Alcatel-Lucent's prior written consent.

1/23/07 Proprietary and Confidential Page iii

Revision 3.4 Software Release 3.0 Volume VII

Alcatel-Lucent About This Document

Command Line Interface Guide 3HP700021015GUZZA

About This Document

Purpose

The Command Line Interface Guide document explains how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to maintain softswitch configuration parameters.

Revision History

Date Revision Author Comments

12-19-03 1.0 D. McFarland Initial draft

01/01/06 2.0 C. Worsham Updated to add information about mobility parameters, translation and routing parameters, and to add new BICC and CAS trunk information. Added error messages and special commands sections.

04/04/06 3.0 A.Chang Corrections to add omitted information. Minor updates to correct incorrect wording.

07/14/2006 3.1 R. Musgrave Updated EMERGENCYCALL.

07/25/2006 3.2 R. Musgrave Made edits.

11/07/06 3.3 C. Worsham Added Acces Type field definition for MSC MCC/MNC section to accommodate new UMA LAC routing capability.

11/23/2006 3.4 C. Worsham Fixed error in Load command.

2/5/07 Proprietary and Confidential Page v


Alcatel-Lucent

Provisioning Office Parameters 3HP700021003GUZZA

Table of ContentsSECTION 1. CLI OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 1-11.2. ARCHITECTURE ..................................................................................................... 1-11.3. COMMAND LINE AND BATCH PROVISIONING ....................................................... 1-2

1.3.1. Launching the CLI ........................................................................................ 1-2

1.3.2. Creating and Loading Batch Files ................................................................ 1-51.4. CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL ................................................................ 1-61.5. CLI CONTEXT HIERARCHY .................................................................................. 1-7

SECTION 2. CLI COMMANDS REFERENCE ................................................................... 2-12.1. ADD ...................................................................................................................... 2-12.2. CD ........................................................................................................................ 2-22.3. CHANGEPWD ......................................................................................................... 2-32.4. DEL ...................................................................................................................... 2-42.5. ECHO .................................................................................................................... 2-52.6. GETALARM ........................................................................................................... 2-62.7. GETEVENT ........................................................................................................... 2-72.8. HELP ..................................................................................................................... 2-82.9. HISTORY ............................................................................................................. 2-112.10. LIST .................................................................................................................. 2-122.11. LISTALIAS ......................................................................................................... 2-132.12. MOD ................................................................................................................ 2-142.13. PAUSE .............................................................................................................. 2-152.14. QUERY ............................................................................................................. 2-162.15. SENDMSG .......................................................................................................... 2-172.16. SET ................................................................................................................... 2-182.17. SETALIAS .......................................................................................................... 2-182.18. SETCATEGORY .................................................................................................. 2-192.19. SETSEVERITY .................................................................................................... 2-212.20. SHOWACTIVEUSERS .......................................................................................... 2-222.21. SHOWSERVERSTATUS ...................................................................................... 2-232.22. TCD ................................................................................................................... 2-242.23. UNALIAS ........................................................................................................... 2-252.24. UP ..................................................................................................................... 2-262.25. WHOAMI ........................................................................................................... 2-27

SECTION 3. CLI SPECIAL COMMANDS REFERENCE .................................................... 3-13.1. LOAD .................................................................................................................... 3-13.2. LOCK ................................................................................................................... 3-23.3. PROT .................................................................................................................... 3-23.4. RESET .................................................................................................................. 3-3

2/5/07 Proprietary and Confidential Page vi


Alcatel-Lucent


3.5. SHUT ..................................................................................................................... 3-43.6. SWITCH ................................................................................................................. 3-43.7. UNLOCK ................................................................................................................ 3-53.8. WHOAMI ............................................................................................................... 3-5

SECTION 4. PROVISIONING THE ATRIUM SIGNALING GATEWAY ............................... 4-14.1. SIGNALING GATEWAY .......................................................................................... 4-14.2. SS7 CARD ............................................................................................................. 4-44.3. LOCAL SSN .......................................................................................................... 4-64.4. ...................................................................................MTP3 ROUTING OR DPCS 4-94.5. LINK SETS .......................................................................................................... 4-124.6. REACHABLE DPCS ............................................................................................. 4-144.7. LINKS .................................................................................................................. 4-154.8. SCCPS ................................................................................................................ 4-174.9. SSNS .................................................................................................................. 4-194.10. GLOBAL TITLE ROUTING .................................................................................. 4-214.11. OWN ........................................................................................ GLOBAL TITLE 4-26

SECTION 5. PROVISIONING THE ATRIUM WIRELESS MEDIA GATEWAY ................... 5-15.1. LOCK .................................................................................................................... 5-15.2. UNLOCK ................................................................................................................ 5-15.3. SHUTDOWN ........................................................................................................... 5-25.4. RESET ................................................................................................................... 5-25.5. SPEEDADD ............................................................................................................ 5-35.6. SPEEDDELETE ....................................................................................................... 5-45.7. MEDIA GATEWAY ................................................................................................. 5-55.8. CARDS ................................................................................................................ 5-175.9. T1 SPAN ............................................................................................................ 5-195.10. VOICE SERVER CARD (VS CARD) .................................................................... 5-255.11. GIGABIT ETHERNET CARD (GIGE CARD) ......................................................... 5-285.12. ATM CARD ...................................................................................................... 5-325.13. CHANNELIZED INTERFACE CARD (CI CARD) ................................................... 5-355.14. OC3 TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX (TDM) CARD ............................................ 5-385.15. TDM SONET FACILITY ................................................................................... 5-425.16. ENABLE DS3 SONETPATH ............................................................................ 5-465.17. .......................................................ENABLE DS1 CHANNELIZATION FOR DS3 5-495.18. ENABLE DS0 CHANNELIZATION FOR UNAS DS1 ........................................... 5-535.19. ISUP CIC PARTITIONING ................................................................................. 5-585.20. ASSIGN DS0 CHANNELS TO BSS ..................................................................... 5-595.21. ASSIGN DS0 CHANNELS TO ISUP .................................................................... 5-615.22. ENABLE VT ON DS3 ........................................................................................ 5-635.23. ENABLE DS0 CHANNELIZATION (UNDER VT GROUP) .................................... 5-645.24. ASSIGN DS0 CHANNELS TO CALEA ............................................................... 5-65

2/5/07 Proprietary and Confidential Page vii


Alcatel-Lucent


SECTION 6. PROVISIONING ATRIUM ROUTING AND TRANSLATION ........................... 6-16.1. PREFIX TREE ......................................................................................................... 6-16.2. PREFIX TRANSLATION AND HLR CONSIDERATIONS ............................................ 6-3

6.2.1. Configuring a Prefix Translation Resource (PREFIXFENCE) .................... 6-3

6.2.2. HLR Considerations for 203-PREFIX Resource .......................................... 6-86.3. NATIONAL TRANSLATION GROUP ........................................................................ 6-96.4. NATIONAL DIGIT TRANSLATION ........................................................................ 6-116.5. INTERNATIONAL COUNTRY CODE TRANSLATION .............................................. 6-136.6. ORIGINATOR ROUTE DESCRIPTOR ...................................................................... 6-156.7. ORIGINATOR ROUTE MODIFIER .......................................................................... 6-166.8. ORIGINATOR ROUTE ........................................................................................... 6-176.9. CIC ROUTE DESCRIPTOR ................................................................................... 6-196.10. CIC ROUTE SELECTOR ..................................................................................... 6-206.11. CIC ROUTE ....................................................................................................... 6-216.12. IMSI ROUTE DESCRIPTOR ................................................................................ 6-236.13. IMSI ROUTE MODIFIER .................................................................................... 6-246.14. IMSI ROUTE ..................................................................................................... 6-256.15. CPC ROUTE DESCRIPTOR ................................................................................. 6-276.16. CPC ROUTE MODIFIER ..................................................................................... 6-286.17. CPC ROUTE ...................................................................................................... 6-306.18. LAC ROUTE DESCRIPTOR ................................................................................ 6-326.19. LAC ROUTE MODIFIER .................................................................................... 6-336.20. LAC ROUTE ..................................................................................................... 6-356.21. TOD ROUTE DESCRIPTOR ................................................................................. 6-376.22. TOD ROUTE SELECTOR .................................................................................... 6-396.23. TOD ROUTE ...................................................................................................... 6-406.24. ROUTE LIST ...................................................................................................... 6-426.25. BASE STATION SYSTEM (BSS) TRUNK GROUPS .............................................. 6-456.26. ISUP TRUNK GROUP ........................................................................................ 6-526.27. TRUNK GROUP BUNDLE ................................................................................... 6-646.28. BICC TRUNK GROUP ....................................................................................... 6-666.29. CAS TRUNK GROUP ......................................................................................... 6-776.30. UTRAN TRUNK GROUP ................................................................................... 6-856.31. LRN LIST ........................................................................................................ 6-876.32. LNP ORDER ...................................................................................................... 6-886.33. CALL SCREENING ............................................................................................. 6-896.34. TERMINATION TYPE ......................................................................................... 6-906.35. MSISDN TO HLR ............................................................................................ 6-91

SECTION 7. CLI MOBILITY CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 7-17.1. MOBILITY CONFIGURATION QUERY COMMANDS ................................................ 7-2

2/5/07 Proprietary and Confidential Page viii


Alcatel-Lucent


7.1.1. Showservices ................................................................................................ 7-2

7.1.2. VLRSubdel ................................................................................................... 7-37.2. VLRSUBQUERY .................................................................................................... 7-47.3. MSC NETWORK NODES ....................................................................................... 7-67.4. OWN MSC/VLR ................................................................................................. 7-107.5. NEIGHBORING MSC/VLR .................................................................................. 7-137.6. MSC EQUIVALENT PLMN LIST ......................................................................... 7-167.7. MSC PLMN ....................................................................................................... 7-187.8. MSC MCC/MNC ............................................................................................... 7-207.9. RAN/BSS ENTITY .............................................................................................. 7-227.10. GSM LAC CELL RANGE .................................................................................. 7-257.11. GLOBAL TITLE ALLOWED ROAMING ............................................................... 7-287.12. MSRN HON DISTRIBUTION ............................................................................. 7-307.13. ODB CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 7-327.14. IMSI TO CCM MAPPING .................................................................................. 7-347.15. MAP MESSAGE IE SETS .................................................................................. 7-357.16. CAP MESSAGE IE SETS ................................................................................... 7-377.17. RESTRICTED PLMN ......................................................................................... 7-397.18. RESTRICTED LAC/CELL RANGE ...................................................................... 7-417.19. DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME ................................................................................ 7-437.20. TIME ZONE DISTRIBUTION ............................................................................... 7-477.21. HOME PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK (HPLMN) CODES ........................... 7-517.22. INTERNATIONAL MOBILE EQUIPMENT IDENTITY (IMEI) CHECKING ............... 7-537.23. GSM TRACE ..................................................................................................... 7-56

SECTION 8. PROVISIONING CALEA ............................................................................. 8-18.1. OVERVIEW OF CALEA SUPPORT ......................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1. Configuring the TCP Connection for Law Enforcement .............................. 8-1

8.1.2. Locking and Unlocking Resources ............................................................... 8-1

8.1.3. Using the Query Command to See if a Resource is Locked ......................... 8-2

8.1.4. Unlocking a Resource ................................................................................... 8-2

8.1.5. Protection ...................................................................................................... 8-28.2. CONFIGURING THE CONNECTION TO THE LEA SERVER ...................................... 8-38.3. SETTING UP CALEA CASES ................................................................................. 8-5

SECTION 9. CLI PROVISIONING FOR E911 .................................................................. 9-19.1. EMERGENCY ZONE ............................................................................................... 9-19.2. EMERGENCY CALL ............................................................................................... 9-5

SECTION 10. CLI ERRORS ........................................................................................... 10-1

1/23/07 Proprietary and Confidential Page 1-1

Revision 3.4 Software Release 3.0 Volume 7

Alcatel-Lucent CLI Overview


SECTION 1 CLI OVERVIEW

1.1 Introduction

The CLI (Command Line Interface) is used to monitor and provision the Atrium Wireless Softswitch. This document introduces the CLI command set and explains how to provision different parts of the Wireless Softswitch.

1.2 Architecture

Commands are issued from a PC or workstation acting as a client. The command interpreter resides on the System Administration Module (SAM), one of the cards on the Wireless Softswitch.You access the CLI command interpretter on the SAM from your PC or workstation BY using Telnet.

Commands may be issued one line at a time, or they can be put into a batch file and sent to the SAM all at once. The figure below depicts this architecture:

Figure 1-1 : CLI Architecture

Command Line and Batch Provisioning

Page 1-2 Proprietary and Confidential 1/23/07

Volume 7 Software Release 3.0 Revision 3.4

CLI Overview Alcatel-Lucent

3HP700021015GUZZA Command Line Interface Guide

1.3 Command Line and Batch Provisioning

CLI commands can be entered interactively at the command line after logging on to the CLI. Alternatively, they can be entered in bulk.

To enter the commands interactively, the user accesses the command port on the Wireless Softswitch using telnet. The user then enters a login ID and password. Once logged in, the CLI prompt displays where the user can then enter the CLI batch load command.

To enter the commands in batch, the user types the commands into a file and stores it on the SAM module of the Wireless Softswitch (WSS) using FTP. The user then logs onto the CLI and issues a Load command. This executes the commands in the file.

See the a Load command in the “CLI Reference” section of this manual for more information.

1.3.1 Launching the CLITo launch the Command Line Interface (CLI) from your PC or workstation:

Step 1 Use Telnet to access the command port on the CLI server:

Example:

telnet 192.168.7.7 5400

In the example, 192.168.7.7 is the IP address of the server where the CLI program resides. The IP address is typically that of the active SAM card because the CLI server runs on the SAM card. The port number is always 5400 as shown in the example.

Step 2 Log in using your UserId and Password. (The is the same UserID and Password used to log in to the Element Management System.)

Example:

UserId: test1

Passwd: spatial1

Step 3 When you are logged in, you will see the System prompt:

Example:

System>

Step 4 Start typing CLI commands at the “System>” prompt:

Example:

System> help

(For online help)






1.3.1.1 Logging off from the CLITo log off from the CLI enter:

System>Exit

1.3.1.2 ADD OperationsFor Adds you can add values for all the parameters of a resource using one command line entry, or you can let the system prompt you for the values. Below is an example of adding a resource using one long command entry:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/International-Translation>add countrycode Country_Code=28, Orig__Route_Descriptor=6, Name=Carltopia, Min__Length=13, Max__Length=15

Command Successful

If you enter the Add command and the resource name with no parameters, this causes the system to prompt you for the parameters. Simply respond with the values requested and press enter in response to each prompt in order to add the values.Below is an example of how the same command will be entered if you choose to let the system prompt you for the parameters individually:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/International-Translation>add countrycode

Country_Code: 28

Orig__Route_Descriptor: 6

Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): Y

Name (Default:Not Defined): Carltopia

Min__Length (Default:7): 13

Max__Length (Default:7): 15

Command Successful

You are prompted for required parameters first. Once they are completed, you are asked whether you want to enter optional values. If you respond Y, you are prompted for them. If you respond N, of course, you will not be prompted forany of the optional parameters.

You do not have to enter values for the optional parameters. They are optional. Just hit the Enter key to skip them. Once you are through entering optional values you can type a period (.) and hit the Enter key. This terminates all prompting and issues the command.






1.3.1.3 Result of a CLI CommandsWhen you enter a CLI command, the command result displays on the screen. For a successful execution, “command successful” displays. For an unsuccessful one, “command failed: <error description>” displays, where <error description> is a description of the error along with its error code.

1.3.1.4 Lock, Unlock, Shut and ResetWhen configuring certain resources, you may have to first shut it down and take it out-of-service before modifying or deleting it. Not all resources must be shut down or locked before modifying them, but it is important to know before you being that some do. After these resources are locked, you can then change their configuration. Once you are through configuring a locked resource, you must unlock it to bring it back into service.

A shut command is issued to shut the resource down. Then, a lock command is used to take a resource out of service. The unlock command is used to bring a locked resource back into service. All three commands have no parameters. You must cd to the resource, then issue the command from within its context.

To determine if lock, unlock and shutdown commands are applicable to a resource, cd to the context of the resource and enter help commands, as shown in the following example:

System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-MSFNODE/Slots/38-1-CHANINTFCARD/38-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY/359696384-SONETPATH/1-VT_GROUP1/1-SONETVT/3729-SPAN>help commands

Commands supported under this context are:

[cd, Set, sendMsg, showactiveusers, showserverstatus, whoami, getevt, getalarm, help, tcd, up, echo, pause, load, setseverity, setcategory, history, Mod, List, Query, SHUTDOWNALLCHAN, SHUTDOWN, LOCKALLCHAN, UNLOCKALLCHAN, UNLOCK, LOCK, Del, Add]

When a resource that must be out-of-service to modify is first added, it is automatically locked by default. It needs to be unlocked to modify it.

The reset command is used for Hardware/Software reset of a resource where applicable.

For more information about the Shut, Lock, Unlock and Reset commands see the instructions in this manual about the individual resource.






1.3.2 Creating and Loading Batch FilesCommands can be typed into a file and then loaded into the Wireless Softswitch as a group of commands. The batch file can be any text file containing the commands you want to issue. To load the file, you log into the CLI just like you were going to use the CLI interactively. (See “Launching the CLI.”) You then issue the Load command.

Conceivably, you could have a batch command file containing thousands of command lines. This is the usual way of provisioning the system the first time. The Wireless Element Manager (WEM), a graphical user interface for entering CLI commands, and the interactive command-line capability are usually used only to make minor changes to the system.

Each command in the batch file follows the same syntax rules as when entering the command interactively. Each command line in the file, though, must be separated by a semi-colon. Below is an example of batch file content that can be loaded into a Wireless Softswitch:

cd;

cd System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation;

add TRANSLATIONGROUP Group_Number=7, Name=Carltopia;

add TRANSLATIONGROUP Group_Number=1, Name=RemainingUSA;

cd;

In the above example, the first CD command line changes to the top level of the hierarchy -- the System level. The next command line changes to the context where the national translation groups reside. This command is followed by a command to add two national translation groups, 7 and 1. Finally, the last CD command is used to change back to the top level of the hierarchy. (All commands are described in detail in this manual.)

If you save the batch file to a location on the Wireless Softswitch named /root/usr/johnbaston/bload/NatXlate.txt, the load command to send it to the Wireless Softswitch would look like this on the CLI command line:

System>load /root/usr/johnbaston/bload/NatXlate.txt, ErrorOutput.txt

In the above example, the ErrorOutput.txt file is an output file where any error messages generated by the batch load are sent.

If you need to stop the batch job before it completes, press cntl-C.

Conventions Used in this Manual





1.4 Conventions Used in this Manual

This manual explains commands by using symbols denoting required fields, selection lists and other command attributes. The symbols used and their meanings are:

Symbol Meaning

< > Words contained in angle braces are variables. Any value can be entered.

{ } Words contained in curly braces represent a selection list.

[ ] Words contained in brackets are optional items.

. . . Indicates that the items in the group preceding the ellipses can be repeated one or more times.

| One of the items separated by the vertical bar (“or” character) must be selected from the list.

CLI Context Hierarchy





1.5 CLI Context Hierarchy

When issuing a CLI command, it only pertains to objects within a given context. For example, if you perform an Add command while the context is System>Wireless-Soft-Switch, the Add command only pertains to the wireless soft switch, if no other context is given in the command line.

Usually, you can see the context in the prompt name. (It is possible to turn off this feature.) For example, the context below is SS7 card configurations in the signaling gateway:

System/Signaling-Gateway/SS7-Card-Config>

The contexts are arranged in a hierarchy. Immediately below the System context are the Nodes, Group, Subscriber-Options, Office-Parameters and Signaling-Gateway contexts within the System context. Below System>Nodes are contexts that pertain only to Nodes, below Wireless-Soft-Switch are contexts that pertain only to soft switches, and so on.

If you enter the List command at the System prompt, a list of the current contexts displays:

System/Nodes>list

Wireless-Soft-Switch

Wireless-Media-Gateway

WMG-Interconnections

To change to a context lower in the hierarchy, enter the cd command followed by the context name. The example below changes to the Signaling-Gateway context just below the System context:

System>cd Signaling-Gateway

To list the contexts below the Signaling-Gateway context enter list:

System/Signaling-Gateway>list

SS7-Card-Config

1-<001-008-165>-OPCCONFIG

Note that the context string in the command prompt changes after executing the cd command. Commands you enter now pertain to the context represented by the new context string. In the example, commands will now pertain to Signaling Gateways within the System.

You can target a command to affect a resource outside the current context by expressing its path name. For example, this command affects the mtp3route that has a destination point code (dpc) of “45.” It changes the destination point code description (dpcdescription) to “test1.”

System/Signaling Gateway/1-65793-OPCCONFIG/MTP3-Routing-DPCs>mod mtp3route dpc=45,

dpcdescription=test1






The examples below shows the context hierarchy:

System>list

Geographic-Redundancy

Nodes

Groups

Subscriber-Options

Fault

Performance

Office-Parameters

Signaling-Gateway

System-Parameters

System-Status

Tools

Accounting

Security

System/Geographic-Redundancy

SS7-Cross-Connects

SS7-OPC-Maps

1-GEOREDXCONPROP

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch

Wss-Protection-Groups

Wss-Cards

System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway

Spatial-Media-Gateway

IWF

System/Nodes/WMG-Interconnections

Intra-WSS

Inter-WSS-<BICC>

IWF-Interconnects

System/Groups>list

ISUP

BSS

BICC

CAS-Trunk

UTRAN

System/Groups/BSS

Groups

Circuits






System/Groups/ISUP

Groups

Circuits

System/Groups/BICC

Groups

System/Groups/CAS-Trunk

Groups

Circuits

System/Groups/UTRAN

Groups

System/Subscriber-Options

Wireless-CALEA

System/Fault

Filters

Event-Definitions

System/Performance

Performance-Control

System/Office-Parameters>list

ISUP-CIC

Optional-Feature-Control

Network-Parameters

Mobility-Config-Parameters

Routing-and-Translation

Service-Parameters

Call-Processing-Parameters

Cause-Code-Categories

Cause-Codes

Ring-Types

SMS

MGCP-Parameters

MSF-Trunk-Interconnects

Overload-Control

System/Office-Parameters/ISUP-CIC

System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters






LATAs

NPDB-Node

1-LRNLISTKEY

1-LNPLISTKEY

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters

Network-Nodes

Own-MSC-or-VLR

Neighborhood-MSC-or-VLR

MSC-Equivalent-PLMN-List

MSC-PLMN

MSC-MCC-and-MNC

RAN-or-BSS-Entity

GSM-LAC-or-CELL

Mobile-Global-Title-or-Allowed-Roaming-Number

MSRN-HON-Distribution

ODB-Config

Subscriber-Query-by-IMSI-or-MSISDN

IMSI-To-CCM-Mapping

MAP-Message-IE-Sets

CAP-Message-IE-Sets

Advice-of-Charge

Restricted-PLMN

Restricted-IMSI-To-HO

LAC-Restriction-Provisioning

Day-Light-Saving-Time-Provisioning

TimeZone-Distribution

LAC-or-CELL-Emergency-Call-Provisioning

Emergency-Service-Zone-Provisioning

HPLMN-Network-Codes

IMEI-Checking

GSM-Trace

MSC-E911-CALL

0-SYSTEMEMERGENCYCALL

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation

MSISDN-To-HLR

Switch-ID-Routing

NOA-Routing

Wireless-Translation

Call-Screening

Routing

Route-List

OutPulse-Map






CLI-OutPulse-Map

Trunk-Group-Bundle

Timed-Based-Substitution

System/Office-Parameters/Service-Parameters

Voice-Mail

CAS-Profile

VoIP-Profile

Ring-Tone-Profiles

Network-Allowed-Services

Service-Network-List

System/Office-Parameters/SMS

SMS-Prepaid

SMPP-Client

Carrier-List

LDP-MNP-Config

System/Signaling-Gateway

Parameters

SS7-Card-Config

MAP

DFTHA-Sys-Mgr

Gateways

System/Signaling-Gateway/Parameters

COMMON

ANSI

ITU

C-7

System/Signaling-Gateway/DFTHA-Sys-Mgr

DFTHA-Resource-Sets

DFTHA-Node-Processor-Ids

System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/n-<n-nnn-n>-n-OPCCONFIG

Local-SSN

MTP3-Routing-DPCs

Link-Sets

SCCPs

Global-Title-Routing

Own-Global-Title

SCTP

Managers






System/Accounting

GSM-Configuration

GSM-Operation

System/Security

User-Groups

Security-Log-Query

System Policy-SECURITYPOLICY



Alcatel-Lucent CLI Commands Reference


SECTION 2 CLI COMMANDS REFERENCE

Each Command Line Interface (CLI) command is described in this section. The commands are presented in alphabetical order. Their use in configuring and provisioning the system is described in other sections of this manual.

2.1 Add

NAME Add

DESCRIPTION Used to add a resource.

SYNTAX add <resource> {name1=value1, name2=value2 . . . }

OPTIONS <resource> Name of the resource you are adding. If you add no parameters following the resource name, the system prompts you with the parameter names.

{name1=value1, name2=value2} Name/value pairs made up of the name of the data you are adding followed by the value for that data.

EXAMPLES The following command adds a translation group:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation>add translationgroup Group_Number=4, Name=CarltopiaCommand Successful

The following command adds an origroute descriptor to a origination route modifier table:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier/2-ORIGROUTEMODIFIER>Add origroute origroute_descriptor=1, digit_type=1, ama_index=1, route_action=0, route_index=0

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

CD



CLI Commands Reference Alcatel-Lucent


2.2 CD

NAME CD

DESCRIPTION Used to change to a new context. Double-dots (..) can be specified to move the context up one level. You may specify contexts by using their full path name. Entering the cd command without parameters sets the context to the top context, System.

SYNTAX cd <contextname | .. >

OPTIONS <contextname | .. >Enter either the pathname of the context to change to or double-dots (..) . You can enter relative or absolute path names. The double-dots (periods) indicate to change to the next higher context above the current context. The contextname can be entered in combination with the double-dots to express a context. For example, ../samelevel expresses a context named “samelevel” on the same level as the current context. If you do not enter the context or the double-dots, the top context, System, is assumed.

EXAMPLES To change from the System context to a context below Office Parameters, named Cause Code Categories:

System>cd Office-Parameters/Cause-Code-Categories>System/Office-Parameters/Cause-Code-Categories>

To move up one context level from the Cause Code Categories to the Office Parameters level:

System/Office-Parameters/Cause-Code-Categories>cd .. System/Office-Parameters>

To move from the Office Parameters context to a context that is on the samelevel as the Office Parameters:

System/Office-Parameters> cd ../GroupsSystem/Groups>

To use an absolute path name with the cd command, the absolute path name starts with a slash (/) and System is the assumed root directory, as follows:

System/Office-Parameters/Ring-Types>cd /nodes/wireless-soft-switch/wss-cardsSystem/Nodes/Wireless-Soft_Switch/Wss-Cards>

FILES None.

SEE ALSO Up.

Changepwd





2.3 Changepwd

NAME Changepwd

DESCRIPTION Used to change your password.

SYNTAX Changepwd newpassword=<value>, confirmpassword=<value>

OPTIONS newpassword The password you want to change to.

confirmpassword Retype the password you want to change to.

EXAMPLES The following is an example of changing a password. The characters you type in response to the NewPassword and Confirmpassword prompts will not be echoed to the screen::

System/Office-Parameters>changepwdNewPassword:

ConfirmPassword:Password successfully changed

Command Successful

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Del





2.4 Del

NAME Del

DESCRIPTION Used to remove an existing resource from the system.

SYNTAX Del <instance>-<resource>

OPTIONS <instance> The instance of the resource that you want to delete.

<resource> The type of resource to delete.

EXAMPLES To delete an MPT3 route that has an instance value of <001-002-003>:

System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-1-OPCCONFIG/MTP3-Routing-DPCs>DEL <001-002-003>-MTP3ROUTE

-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

To delete a translation group that has an instance value of 2:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation>DEL 2-TRANSLATIONGROUP

-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Please note that when the del command is issued from a batch file, there are no prompts asking whether you are sure you want to delete the file.

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Echo





2.5 Echo

NAME Echo

DESCRIPTION Prints a string to the client. This can be used in a batch file to issue messages to the CLI command screen while the batch file is executing so that the user can monitor the progress of the batch job.

SYNTAX Echo <string>

OPTIONS <string> The string to print.

EXAMPLES To display the word “hi.”

System>echo hiSystem>hiCommand Completed

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Getalarm





2.6 Getalarm

NAME Getalarm

DESCRIPTION Lists outstanding alarm messages on your screen starting from the eventcode given, or stores the list in a file you specify. The list gives each code’s description, including its severity and category. This command can be issued under any context. Any file specified is stored on the System Administration Module (SAM), not on your local PC. The file name specification is relative to the root directory on the SAM. If you do not specify a file name, a “Prompt for optional” question displays that can be answered y, yes, n or no. If you specify y or yes, you can give a file name where the alarm messages will be stored; otherwise, if you specify n or no, the messages display on the your screen.

SYNTAX getalarm eventcode=<number,> [<outputfile>]

OPTIONS eventcode= Required parameter.

<number> Starting event code for outstanding alarm messages that are qualified to be displayed. The default is 1.

[<outputfile>] Optionally, you can specify an output file name. Any file specified will be stored on the System Administration Module (SAM) relative to the root directory.

EXAMPLES To display alarms starting with a 1000:

System>getalarm eventcode=1Prompt for optional (y/yes/n/no): n1017: MINOR:PLATFORM:2003/5/29 4:16:37 An attempt to log in to the EMS GUI client was not successful. This alarm should be manually cleared by Group 0 users only.10271: CRITICAL:PLATFORM:2003/5/30 2:48:51 OamFault has moved a WSS card out of operational state.Command Completed

To display alarms starting with 10270 and store the results in a file named root/usr/admin/alarms.txt on the SAM:

System>getalarm eventcode=10270Prompt for optional (y/yes/n/no): yesFile name: /usr/admin/alarms.txtCommand Completed

FILES None.

SEE ALSO Getevent, Set, Setcategory, Setseverity.

Getevent





2.7 Getevent

NAME Getevent

DESCRIPTION Lists outstanding event messages on your screen starting from the eventcode given, or stores the list in a file you specify. The list gives each code’s description, including its severity and category. This command can be issued under any context. Any file specified is stored on the System Administration Module (SAM), not on your local PC. The file name specification is relative to the root directory on the SAM. If you do not specify a file name, a “Prompt for optional” question displays that can be answered y, yes, n or no. If you specify y or yes, you can give a file name where the alarm messages will be stored; otherwise, if you specify n or no, the messages display on the your screen.

SYNTAX getevent eventcode=<value>

OPTIONS eventcode Starting event code for the outstanding event messages qualified to be displayed. The default is 1.

EXAMPLES To display outstanding events starting with event code 10270:

System>getevent eventcode=10270

To display alarms starting with 10270 and store the results in a file named root/usr/admin/EVENTS.txt on the SAM:

System>getevent eventcode=10270Prompt for optional (y/yes/n/no): yesFile name: /usr/admin/EVENTS.txtCommand Completed

FILES None.

SEE ALSO Getalarm, Set, Setcategory, Setseverity.

Help





2.8 Help

NAME Help

DESCRIPTION Explains how to use a specified CLI command or lists the commands available for the current context. After you enter the Help command, you are asked for a number 1 through 4 to specify the kind of help output you want, as follows:

Number Information Displayed1 Displays only the information about required parameters.2 Displays only the information about the optional parameters.3 Displays all the information, about required and optional

parameters.4 Displays only the parameter names for the command with no

information about the parameters.

SYNTAX Help <command> [resource] [parameter] | commands

OPTIONS <command> Help information is displayed about the command name given here.

[resource] The usage of a command can vary according to the type of resource. For example, an Add command for one type of node may require different parameters from an Add command issued on a different type of node. To specify the resource, type its name following the command. (Ex: Help Add csdnode.) The resource name specified must available within the current context.

[parameter] To display help only for one parameter within the command, enter the parameter name.

commands The literal “commands” can be entered instead of a specific command to get a list of the commands available under the current context.

Help





EXAMPLES To display help for the Add command as it applies to a translationgroup resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation>help add translationgroup

Enter 1 to display the mandatory parametersEnter 2 to display the optional parametersEnter 3 to display all the parametersEnter 4 display only parameter names without descriptionEnter the parameter name to get the help for that parameter onlyPlease enter the appropriate option :1

Usage: add <resource name> {name1=value1, name2=value2..} OR For adding contained object instancesUsage: add <resource name> {name1=value1, name2=value2..} {name1=value1..)&(name1=value2,..)Add translationgroup<Group_Number=value> Specifies the translation group number.Type is:long,MIN:1,MAX:65535,DEFAULT:Not Defined

Command Successful

To issue the help command to see the commands available under the current context.

System>help commands

Commands supported under this context are:

Generic : cd, changepwd, Set, sendMsg, whoami, help, tcd, up, echo, pause, load, setAlias, unAlias, listAlias, history .System : showserverstatus.Fault : getevent, getalarm, setseverity, setcategory.Security : showactiveusers.Configuration : list

Command Completed

Help





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

To issue the help command for an individual parameter:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/Prefix-Translation/1-prefix>help add prefixfence protocol_typeUsage: add <resource name> {name1=value1, name2=value2..} OR For adding contained obect instances Usage: add <resource name> {name1=value1, name2=value2..} (name1=value1..)&(name1=value2,..)Add prefixfence<Protocol_Type=value> Type of protocol Type is:enum,Valid values are:[CAMEL->1, INAP->2]

Command Successful

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

History





2.9 History

NAME History

DESCRIPTION Displays the last 20 commands issued.

SYNTAX history

OPTIONS No parameters for this command.

EXAMPLES To display the history:

System>History

1. history2. help setalias3. help set alias4. listalias5. set alias add6. set alias7. setalias8. set alias add dda9. set alias10. help setalias11. setcategory plat=on12. list13. help commands14. tcd groups15. tcd16. help tcd17. help commands18. help19. help help20. cd . .

Command Completed

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

List





2.10 List

NAME List

DESCRIPTION Displays a list of the objects directly below the current context that are within the current context.

SYNTAX list


EXAMPLE To display a list of objects under the Office-Parameters context:

System/Office-Parameters>listISUP-CICNetwork-ParametersMobility-Config-ParametersRouting-ParametersService-ParametersCall-Processing-ParametersCause-Code-CategoriesCause-CodesRing-TypesMSF-Trunk-Interconnects

Command Completed

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Listalias





2.11 Listalias

NAME Listalias

DESCRIPTION Displays a list of all aliases that have been created.

SYNTAX listalias


EXAMPLE To create a list of aliases:

System>listaliasla qshow usersCommand successful.

FILES None.

SEE ALSO Setalias, Unalias.

Mod





2.12 Mod

NAME Mod

DESCRIPTION Used to modify a resource.

SYNTAX If the operation is done inside a resource context, it applies only to that resource and the syntax is:

mod {name1=value1, name2=value2, . . . }

If the operation is performed from outside the current context, the syntax must specify the resource name, as follows:

mod <resource> <idname>=<id> , {name1=value1, name2=value2, . . . }

OPTIONS <resource> If you are outside the resource contex, the resource name is required. If you are already positioned with the resource context, the resource name is not required.

<idname=id> The name of the resource’s indentification parameter followed by its unique identification value. For some resources, you will be required to enter more than one idname=id pair to identify the resource. When using the system interactively, you are prompted for any required idname=id pair you do not enter, but you must enter at least one. A comma must follow the idname=id name/value pair(s).

{name1=value1, name2=value2, . . .}The name of a parameter to be modified followed by the new value for the parameter.

EXAMPLES To change the name parameter in translation group number 2 to the value “NewName:”

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation>mod translationgroup group_number=2, name=newname

Command Successful

The command below specifies the resource to change. The resource is mtp3route. The command affects the specific mtp3route identified by the point code 001-096-001.

System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<001-021-255>-4-OPCCONFIG/MTP3-Routing-DPCs>mod mtp3route point_code=001-096-001, name=Carltopia

Command Successful

Pause





2.13 Pause

EXAMPLES The following changes the IP address for legal agency access. (Note that this resource must be locked before the modification can be done, as shown in the example.)

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode/2-leatcpconnection>lock-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ?YCommand Successful

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode/2-leatcpconnection>mod ip=192.167.7.7

Command Successful

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

NAME Pause

DESCRIPTION Stops the client process for a specified time period.

SYNTAX pause <sec>

OPTIONS <sec> Number of seconds to pause the client process.

EXAMPLE The following command pauses the client for ten seconds:

System/Nodes>pause 10

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Query





2.14 Query

NAME Query

DESCRIPTION Displays a resource’s parameter names and their values. The query command with no parameters shows the names and values for the current resource context. You may specify a specific resource when not in a resource context.

SYNTAX query [<instance>-<resource>]

OPTIONS <resource> Optional parameter used when you want to specify a resource instead of accepting the current context as the query object.

<instance> If explicitly specifying a resource instead of using the current context as the resource, you can give a unique identification for the resource by entering the identifier name and the value for the unidentified.

EXAMPLE The following command displays the parameter names and their values for an mtp3 route when in the route’s resource context:

System/Signaling Gateway/Gateways/1-<001-021-255>-4-OPCCONFIG/MTP3-Routing-DPCs/<001-096-001>-MTP3ROUTE>query

MTP3ROUTE:-

Properties:

CLLI_Code [CLLI Code].......45616516516ISUP_Protocol [ISUP Protocol].......15Gateway_No [Gateway No].......1Name [Name].......bpPoint_Code [Point Code].......001-096-001SLS_Range [SLS Range].......sls_range_4bit -> 16Node_Type [Node Type].......SP_TYPE -> 0adjacent_PC [adjacent PC].......N->0Network_ID [Network Type].......C7 -> 4

State:

Active_Link_Sets [Active Link Sets].......0State [State].......MTP3R_UNAVAILABLE -> 1Congestion_Indicator [Congestion Indicator].......NA_CONGESTED -> 4

Command Successful

Sendmsg





2.15 Sendmsg

EXAMPLE (CONT.)

The same command as above issued using the {idname=id}option would be entered from the MTP3-Routing-DPCs level like this:

System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<001-021-255>-4-OPCCONFIG/MTP3-Routing-DPCs>QUERY <001-096-001>-MTP3ROUTE

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

NAME Sendmsg

DESCRIPTION Sends a message to another user.

SYNTAX sendmsg user=<username>, msg=<message>

OPTIONS user The login name of the user to receive the message. Defaults to all users.

msg The text of the message to be sent.

EXAMPLE The following command sends the message “hello” to test4:

System>sendmsg user=test4, msg=Hello

The output on test4’s terminal will appear as follows:

[Mon Jun 02 17:38:53 CDT 2003] Message from admin: Hello.

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Set





2.16 Set

2.17 Setalias

NAME Set

DESCRIPTION Turns events, alarms or prompts on or off.

SYNTAX set {event|alarm|prompt}={on|off}

OPTIONS {event|alarm|prompt}Indicates what is to be turned on or off -- events, alarms or the CLI context in the CLI prompt. If alarms or events are turned off, they are no longer displayed until they are turned back on.

{on|off} Indicates whether the event, alarm or prompt is to be turned on or off.

EXAMPLE The following command turns alarms off:

Set alarm=off

FILES No.

SEE ALSO Getalarm, Getevent, Setcategory, Setseverity.

NAME Setalias

DESCRIPTION Used to create an alternative name for a command. You can enter the new name to execute the command. The old command is not replaced and can still be used.

SYNTAX setalias cmd=<value> alias=<value>

OPTIONS cmd Required entry that identifies the command for which you want to create an alias.

alias Required entry to establish the alias for the command named in the cmd parameter.

EXAMPLE The following command creates an alias of “q” for the query command:

Setalias cmd=query, alias=q

FILES No.

SEE ALSO Unalias, Listalias.

admin

Highlight

admin

Highlight

Setcategory





2.18 Setcategory

NAME Setcategory

DESCRIPTION Used to establish the categories of events and alarms that will display on the CLI screen.

SYNTAX setcategory {-alarm} { {plat|datab|bill|extrn|ntw|swlog|overload|calea|perfm| secur|resrc|debug|cnf|sign|sgw|cot|noblk|access|ckt|app|resrc2} = {on/off} , . . . }

OPTIONS {-alarm} Include the -alarm subcommand to indicate that the setcategory command will apply to events that are alarms, as well as events that are not alarms. (Alarms are a subset of events.) If the -alarm subcommand is left out of the command line, the setcategory command only applies to events that are not also alarms.

{plat|datab|bill|extrn|ntwk swlog|overload|calea|perfm|secur|resrc|debug|config|sign|sgw|cot|noblk|access|ckt|app|resrc2}Indicates the category or categories of events to be turned on or off. You can enter multiple categories and their on/off attribute in one command line. If you enter the setcategory command without specifying a category, the system asks whether you want to be prompted for each category. Respond N to abort the command or Y to be prompted. If you respond Y, each category displays and you may answer On or Off to indicate whether you want that category of command to display.

{on|off} Enter On to display event messages in the category or Off to suppress their display.

Setcategory





EXAMPLE The following command keeps events in the plat category from displaying. It affects events, but not alarms, in the plat category:

System>setcategory plat=off

The command below lets the events and alarms in the plat category display:

System>setcategory -alarm plat=on

Turns several categories of events and alarms off:

System>setcategory -alarm ntwk=off, swlog=off, access=off

To lists each event so that you can specify which ones are to be turned on or off:

System>setcategorySystem>Prompt for optional? Yesplat: ondata : offbill: onextrn: |. ..

FILES No.

SEE ALSO Getalarm, Getevent, Set, Setseverity.

admin

Highlight

admin

Highlight

Setseverity





2.19 Setseverity

NAME Setseverity

DESCRIPTION Sets the severity of events and alarms to display. You can display any combination of critical, minor, warning or informational events and alarms.

SYNTAX setseverity {-alarm} { {critical|major|minor|warning|inform}={on|off} , . . .}

OPTIONS {-alarm} Include the -alarm subcommand to indicate that the setseverity command will apply to events that are alarms, as well as events that are not alarms. (Alarms are a subcategory of event.) If the -alarm subcommand is left out of the command line, the setseverity command only applies to events that are not also alarms.

{critical|major|minor|warning|inform}Indicates what severity of messages are to be turned on or off. If a certain severity of event or alarm is turned off, it will no longer display until it is turned back on.

{on|off} Indicates whether the given severity level of message is to be displayed (On) or the display of it is to be supressed (Off).

EXAMPLE The following command turns alarms off:

Setseverity inform=off

FILES No.

SEE ALSO Getalarm, Getevent, Setcategory, Set.

Showactiveusers





2.20 Showactiveusers

NAME Showactiveusers

DESCRIPTION Lists users who are currently logged into the switch, including Wireless Element Management (WEM) users and CLI users.

SYNTAX showactiveusers

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE The following command lists active users:

System>showactiveuserstest4-USERACCOUNTtest1-USERACCOUNTadmin-USERACCOUNT

Command Successful

FILES No.

SEE ALSO

Showserverstatus





2.21 Showserverstatus

NAME Showserverstatus

DESCRIPTION Shows the status of the active and stand by EMS server.

SYNTAX showserverstatus

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE The following command lists active users:

System>showserverstatus

Version Release 2.1.12.0 build srcbase.20030725ActiveMSCHostName wss6_all_1_1_1StandbyMSCHostName wss6_all_1_1_1HostIpAddress 192.168.45.10PeerHostIpAddress ActiveMSCHostIpAddress 192.168.45.10Status ems.emscorba.common.enumdefs.ServerStatusEnum@76788aPeerStatus ems.emscorba.common.enumdefs.ServerStatusEnum@425343ConnectionToPeerStatus ems.emscorba.common.enumdefs.PeerConnectionStatusEnum@63ac42HostName wss6_all_1_1_1StandbyMSCHostIpAddress 192.168.45.10PeerHostName

Command Successful

FILES No.

SEE ALSO

Tcd





2.22 Tcd

NAME Tcd

DESCRIPTION This command changes the context to a specified temporary context. Any commands to use the temporary context must be typed on the same line following a semicolon. After the tcd command is issued the context changes back to what it was before.

SYNTAX tcd <tempcontext>; {commands}

OPTIONS <tempcontext> The pathname of the temporary context.

{commands} Any commands to execute from within the temporary context.

EXAMPLE The following commands list the contexts below the System context. They then temporarily change the context from System to System/Fault and performs another list command:

System>list NodesGroupsSubscriber-OptionsOffice-ParametersSignaling GatewaySystem-ParametersCommand CompletedSystem>tcd Fault;listFiltersEvent-Definitions

FILES No.

SEE ALSO

Unalias





2.23 Unalias

NAME Unalias

DESCRIPTION Removes an alias.

SYNTAX unalias alias=<alias>

OPTIONS alias Required entry that identifies the alias you want ot remove.

EXAMPLE The following command removes an alias named “q:”

Unalias q

FILES No.

SEE ALSO Setalias, Listalias.

Up





2.24 Up

NAME Up

DESCRIPTION Changes the context to the parent context. It is the same as performing the cd .. command.

SYNTAX up [<contextname>]

OPTIONS <contextname> Optional name of a context higher in the current context path that you can change to if you want to move up more than one level. If you leave this off, the default is the next higher context level.

EXAMPLE The following command changes to the next higher context above the 40-11card resource.

System/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/Slots/40-11card>upCommand Successful.

System/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/Slots>

The following command changes to the Office-Parameters context:

System/Office-Parameters/Service-Parameters/VoIP-Profile>up Office-Parameters

Command Successful

System/Office-Parameters>

FILES No.

SEE ALSO CD

Whoami





2.25 Whoami

NAME Whoami

DESCRIPTION Displays the current user name.

SYNTAX whoami

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE A user named “admin” performs the whoami command:

System/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/Slots/40-11card>upSystem/Nodes>whoamiadminCommand Completed

FILES No.

SEE ALSO

Whoami







Alcatel-Lucent CLI Special Commands Reference


SECTION 3 CLI SPECIAL COMMANDS REFERENCE

Some Command Line Interface (CLI) commands are used for special purposes and are not available at all times on all kinds of resources. These are described in this section.

3.1 Load

NAME Load

DESCRIPTION Used to execute a batch file of CLI commands. Executes commands in a specified file. The results can be directed into another file. Autologout option enables the user to log out once the load command is entered.

SYNTAX load [-autologout] inputfile=<x>, [outputfile=<y>,] [abort=yes|no]

OPTIONS -autologout Optional literal that says to log out the user immediately after issuing the load command.

inputfile Mandatory name of the file containing the list of commands to execute.

outputfile Optional name of an output file to create where the response to the commands will be stored.

abort If Yes, aborts the load command upon encountering an error in the inputfile; if No, continues the load command upon encountering an error in the file. This specification is optional. The default is No.

EXAMPLE To execute a file named bigprovisioner.conf and direct the output to a file named bpmessages.txt:

System>load inputfile=bigprovisioner.conf, outputfile=bpmessages.txt

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Lock



CLI Special Commands Reference Alcatel-Lucent


3.2 Lock

3.3 Prot

NAME Lock

DESCRIPTION Administratively locks the resource in the current context, taking it out of service until they are unlocked. You must cd to the resource you want to lock. In order to update some resources, you must first lock them.

SYNTAX lock

OPTIONS No parameters required. The command pertains to the current resource only.

EXAMPLE The following command locks the 11 card:

System/ Nodes/ MSFNodes/ 1-msfnode/ Slots/ 40-1-11card>lock

FILES None.

SEE ALSO Unlock.

NAME Prot

DESCRIPTION Clears or locks out protection.

SYNTAX Prot {-lock}

OPTIONS {-lock} Indicates to lock protection.

EXAMPLE The following command clears protection:

System>Prot

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Reset





3.4 Reset

NAME Reset

DESCRIPTION Resets hardware or software for a resource, trunk or line group.

SYNTAX reset [-sw | -grp]

OPTIONS [-sw | -grp] You can enter -sw or -grp to distinguish whether the command is to affect software or a group. Where confusion might exist for a given context, this is required.

EXAMPLE The following command resets a channelized interface card:

system/ Nodes/ MSFNodes/ 10-msfnode/ Slots/ 37-2-Chanintfcard>reset

FILES None.

SEE ALSO

Shut





3.5 Shut

3.6 Switch

NAME Shut

DESCRIPTION Administratively shuts down a resource.

SYNTAX shut

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE The following command shuts down the 11 card:

system/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/slots/40-11card>shut

FILES No.

SEE ALSO

NAME Switch

DESCRIPTION This command can be used to perform switchover to the protecting unit.

SYNTAX switch -f

OPTIONS -f Forces the switchover.

EXAMPLE The following command performs the switchover to the protecting unit of the channelized interface card.

system/ Nodes/ MSFNodes/ 10-msfnode/ Slots/ 37-2-Chanintfcard> switch

FILES No.

SEE ALSO

Unlock





3.7 Unlock

3.8 Whoami

NAME Unlock

DESCRIPTION Administratively unlocks the resource in the current context. You must cd to the resource you want to unlock. Unlocking a resource can put it back into service.

SYNTAX unlock

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE The following command unlocks the 11 card in slot 40.

System/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/Slots/40-11card>unlock

FILES No.

SEE ALSO Lock.

NAME Whoami

DESCRIPTION Displays the current user name.

SYNTAX whoami

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE A user named “admin” performs the whoami command:

System/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/Slots/40-11card>upSystem/Nodes>whoamiadminCommand Completed

FILES No.

SEE ALSO

Whoami







Alcatel-Lucent Provisioning the Atrium Signaling Gateway

3HP700021015GUZZA

SECTION 4 PROVISIONING THE ATRIUM SIGNALING GATEWAY

This section of the Command Line Interface Guide explains how to set up the signaling gateway in the Atrium Wireless Soft Switch (WSS).

4.1 Signaling Gateway

The Add OPCCONFIG command establishes an instance of a signaling gateway in the Wireless

Softswitch (WSS).

NAME Add OPCCONFIG

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add OPCCONFIG {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

PARAMETERS OPC1Gateway_Number Number of SS7 Gateway WSS supports. Required.

OPC1Network_ID This is a required parameter that denotes the standard used for traffic on this gateway, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 ANSI922 ITU_INTL3 ITU_NAL4 C75 ITU_RES6 ANSI96

OPC1own_point_codeThe gateway’s own point code value. Required. Valid values are existing point codes.

OPC1CLLI_code The common language location identifier used to identify equipment, facilities and other telecom company entities. Required. Must be 11 alphanumeric characters.

OPC1backup_pc_indicatorThis is a required parameter that denotes if the backup point code indicator is present as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Point code indicator is not present1 Point code indicator is present

OPC1gateway_nameUser-defined number for the SS7 signaling gateway. Optional. Can be a value from 1 through 16.

Signaling Gateway



Provisioning the Atrium Signaling Gateway Alcatel-Lucent


PARAMETER(CONT.)

OPC1acc_indicatorThis is an optional parameter that denotes if the Automatic Congestion Control (ACC) Indicator is present as follows:

Value Meaning

0 ACC Indicator is not present1 ACC Indicator is present

OPC1backup_pc Backup Point Code. Optional. Must be entered in the format nnn-nnn-nnn. Minimum value allowed is 0-0-0, with the maximum value allowed 255-255-255.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the resource context, use this format:

Del <n>-<nnn-nnn-nnn>-OPCCONFIG

Mod OPCCONFIG OPC1gateway_number=value, OPC1own_point_code=value, OPC1network_id=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

From inside the resource context, use this format:

Mod {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

EXAMPLES To enter the OPCCONFIG values from the command prompt, at the System/System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways context:

add opcconfigOPC1Gateway_Number:1OPC1Network_ID:1OPC1Own_Point_Code:000-000-001OPC1CLLI_Code:12345678912OPC1Backup_PC_Indicator:0Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): yOPC1Gateway_Name (Default:Not Defined):0OPC1ACC_Indicator (Default:Y):1OPC1Backup_PC (Default:0):000-000-002Command Successful

Signaling Gateway





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

An add opcconfig command as it might appear in a batch file:

cd;cd Signaling-Gateway;add opcconfig OPC1Gateway_Number=1, OPC1Network_ID=1, OPC1Own_Point_Code=000-000-001, OPC1CLLI_Code=12345678912, OPC1Backup_PC_Indicator=0, OPC1Gateway_Name=0, OPC1ACC_Indicator=1, OPC1Backup_PC=000-000-002;cd;

The following is an example of using the Mod command:

mod OPC1Backup_PC_Indicator=0

The following is an example of using the Del command:

del 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG

SS7 Card





4.2 SS7 Card

The Add SS7CARD command establishes an instance of an SS7 Card in the Wireless Softswitch

(WSS).

NAME Add SS7CARD

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/SS7-Card-Config

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SS7CARD {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

PARAMETERS Sim_Card_ID Identifies the WSS node of the card to be administered. Required. Valid values are 1 or 2.

Card Identifies the card number to be provisioned. Required. Minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value allowed of 8. The default is 1.

Link_Class This is a required parameter that classifies the link as follows:

Value Meaning

0 MTP2LINK7 SAALLINK10 HSLINK

Interface_Type This is an optional parameter that identifies the interface type of the card to be administered as follows:

Value Meaning

2 T1 (Default)3 E1

Baud_Rate This is an optional parameter that denotes the baud rate as follows:

Value Meaning

56 DATARATE5664 DATARATE64 (Default)1544 DATARATE1544

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<n>-SS7CARD

SS7 Card





EXAMPLES To enter the SS7CARD values from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/SS7-Card-Config context:

add ss7cardSim_Card_Id:1Card:1Link_Class:1Interface_Type (Default:2):2Baud_Rate (Default:64):64Command Successful

An add SS7CARD command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway; cd SS7-Card-Config;add ss7card Sim_Card_Id =1, Card=1, Link_Class=1, Interface_Type=2, Baud_Rate=64;cd;


del 1-1-SS7CARD

Local SSN





4.3 Local SSN

The Add SGWOWNSSN command adds a local subsystem number to the signaling gateway.

NAME Add SGWOWNSSN

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/<n>-<<nnn-nnn-nnn>>-OPCCONFIG/Local-SSN

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SGWOWNSSN {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

Local SSN





PARAMETERS SSN Own Node TCAP SubSystemNumber SSN number. Required. The minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value allowed of 255. The default is 1.

No_of_concerned_PCNumber of concerned point codes. Required. Can be a value from 0 through 5.

Concerned_pc_1Concerned point code 1. Required. Valid values are existing point codes.


Concerned_pc_3Concerned point code 3. Required.Valid values are existing point codes.


Variant Network type. Optional. Valid values are:

Value Meaning1 ITU_88 (Default)2 ITU_923 ANSI_884 ANSI_925 ANSI_967 ITU_96

Application Application Identification. Optional. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

3 BSC GSM7 MAP11 CAP19 INAP35 NPDB71 IS41 + MAP131 IWF APP259 GSM SMLC/BSC CDMA170 SGSN771 RANAP

Concerned_pc_5 Concerned point code 5. Optional. Valid values are existing point codes.

Local SSN





OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-SGWOWNSSN

Mod SGWOWNSSN SSN=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



EXAMPLES To enter the local subsystem values from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/Local-SSN context:

add SGWOWNSSNSSN:1No_of_concerned_PC:1Concerned_PC_1:000-000-007Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): yVariant (Default:1):1Application (Default:3):3Command Successful

An add sgwownssn command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway;cd Gateways;cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;cd Local-SSN;add SGWOWNSSN SSN=1, No_of_concerned_PC=1, Concerned_pc_1= 000-000-007, Variant=1, Application=3;cd;


mod No_of_concerned_PC=1


del 1-SGWOWNSSN

MTP3 Routing or DPCs





4.4 MTP3 Routing or DPCs

The Add MTP3ROUTE command adds Message Transfer Part 3 (MTP3) routing destination

point codes (DPC) to the signaling gateway. These are required to set up the SS7 links.

NAME Add MTP3ROUTE

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/<n>-<<nnn-nnn-nnn>>-OPCCONFIG/MTP3-Routing-DPCs

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add MTP3ROUTE point_code=<value>, CLLI_code=<value>, Isup_protocol=<value>, node_type=<value>, [adjacent_PC=<value>,] [Name=<alue>,] [sls_Range=<value>]

PARAMETERS MTP3ROUTE This is a required keyword denoting the MTP3 routing DPC.

point_code Specifies the Destination Point Code. Required. Valid values are: [0..7]-[0..255]-[0..7].

CLLI_code Specifies the CLLI code. Required. Must be 11 alphanumeric characters. The default is Not Defined.

Isup_protocol This is an optional parameter denoting the ISUP protocol of this route as follows:

Value Meaning

1 isupProt_itu3 isupProt_ansi9211 isupProt_ansi95 (Default)27 isupProt_ansi92GRS.

adjacent_PC This is an optional parameter that indicates whether this route is to an adjacent signaling point as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No (Default)1 Yes

node_type This is a required parameter that denotes the switch type as follows:

Value Meaning

0 SP (Default)1 STP






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Name Provides a freeform name for the MTP3 route. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value allowed of 16. The default is Not Defined.

sls_Range This is an optional parameter that Indicates SLS Range type of this route as follows:

Value Meaning

16 sls_range_4bit32 sls_range_5bit (Default)256 sls_range_8bit

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <nnn-nnn-nnn>-MTP3ROUTE

Mod MTP3ROUTE point_code=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}








EXAMPLES To enter the MTP3 Routing DPCs from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/MTP3-Routing-DPCs context:

add mtp3routepoint_code:000-000-002CLLI_Code:12345678912Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): yISUP_Protocol:0adjacent_PC (Default:N):0Node_Type:0Name (Default:Not Defined):testSLS_Range (Default:32):32Command Successful

An add mtp3route command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway/Gateways;cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;cd MTP3-Routing-DPCs;add mtp3route point_code=0000-000-002, CLLI_Code=12345678912, ISUP_Protocol=0, adjacent_PC=0, Node_Type=0, Name=test, SLS_Range=32;cd;


mod Name=testlab


del <001-002-003>-MTP3ROUTE

Link Sets





4.5 Link Sets

The Add MTP3LINKSET command adds link sets to the signaling gateway. Before creating the

link sets, you must set up the oringation and destination point codes.

NAME Add MTP3LINKSET

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/<n>-<nnn-nnn-nnn>-OPCCONFIG/Link-Sets

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add MTP3LINKSET Link_Set_Id=<value>, Adjacent_DPC=<value>, Point_Code=<value>

PARAMETERS Link_Set_Id Link Set Id. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 128.

Adjacent_DPC Adjacent Destination Point Code. Required. Valid values are derived from existing destination point code (DPC) entries.

Point_Code Origination Point Code. Required. Valid values are derived from existing destination point code (DPC) entries.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-MTP3LINKSET

Mod MTP3LINKSET link_set_id=<value>, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



Link Sets





EXAMPLES To add link sets from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/Link-Sets context:

add mtp3linksetlink_set_id:10 Adjacent_DPC:000-000-007Point_Code:000-008-005No Optional Parameters for this ResourceCommand Successful

An add sgwownssn command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd; Cd Signaling-Gateway;cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;cd Link-Sets;add mtp3linkset Link_Set_Id=10, Adjacent_DPC=000-000-007, Point_Code=000-008-005;Cd;


mod Adjacent_DPC=000-000-006


del 1-MTP3LINKSET

Reachable DPCs





4.6 Reachable DPCs

The Add MTP3COMBLINKSET command adds reachable Destination Point Codes (DPC) to the link set. To add a DPC to the ling set, the DPC must already be set up in the system.

NAME Add MTP3COMBLINKSET

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/<n>-<<nnn-nnn-nnn>>-OPCCONFIG/Link-Sets/<n>-MTP3LINKSET/Reachable-DPCs

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add MTP3COMBLINKSET {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

PARAMETERS Destination_PC Specifies the point code that can be reached through this linkset. Required. Valid values are the point codes of existing DPCs.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <nnn-nnn-nnn>-MTP3COMBLINKSET

EXAMPLES To add reachable DPCs from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/Link-Sets/1-MTP3LINKSET/Reachable-DPCs context:

add MTP3COMBLINKSETDestination_PC:000-000-002Command Successful

The MTP3COMBLINKSET command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway;Cd Gateways;cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;cd Link-Sets;cd 1-MTP3LINKSET; cd Reachable-DPCs;add MTP3COMBLINKSET Destination_PC=000-000-002;Cd;


del <000-000-005>-MTP3COMBLINKSET

Links





4.7 Links

The Add MTPLINK command add SS7 links to the link set.

NAME Add MTPLINK

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/<n>-<nnn-nnn-nnn>-OPCCONFIG/Link-Sets/<n>-MTP3LINKSET/Links

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add MTPLING SIM_Card_Id=<value>, Port_No=<value>, [Channel_No=<value>,] Link_Id=<value>, [SLC=<value>,] Test_Pattern=<value>, [Baud_Rate=<value>]

PARAMETERS SIM_Card_Id Identifies the WSS node of the card to be administered. Required. Valid values are 1 or 2.

Port_No Specifies the port number in the card. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of 10. The default is 1.

Channel_No Specifies the channel number for T1/E1. The minimum allowed value is 1. The maximum value for T1 is 24 and E1 is 32.

Link_Id Specifies the MTP3 Link Index. This is used as SpId (SuId). Required. Valid values are 1 through <maximum number of links available in the WSS>.

SLC Specifies the signaling link selection code for link Test. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum value of 15.

Test_Pattern Specifies the link test pattern in the form of hex digits. This must be an even number of digits. Required. The maximum number of digits is 30.

Baud_Rate This is an optional parameter that denotes the data rate as follows:

Value Meaning

56 DATARATE5664 DATARATE64 (Default)1544 DATARATE1544

Links





OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-MTPLINK

Mod MTPLINK Link_Id=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



EXAMPLES To add links from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/Link-Sets/1-MTP3LINKSET/Links context:

add mtplinksim_card_id:1port_no:1Channel_No:1Link_Id:2slc:2Test_Pattern:2222Baud_Rate:64Command Successful

An add mtplink command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway;cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;cd Link-Sets; cd 1-MTP3LINKSET;cd Links;Add mtplink sim_card_id=1, port_no=1, Channel_No=1, Link_Id=2, slc=2, Test_Pattern=2222, Baud_Rate=64;Cd;


mod Test_Pattern=2222


del 1-MTPLINK

SCCPs





4.8 SCCPs

The Add SCCPROUTE adds Signaling Connection Control Parts (SCCP)s to the signaling gateway. You must add the point codes to the system before setting up the SCCP routes.

NAME Add SCCPROUTE

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/<n>-<nnn-nnn-nnn>-OPCCONFIG/SCCPs

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SCCPROUTE {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

PARAMETERS Point_Code Specifies the origination point code. Required. Valid values are exiting originating point code values.

Backup_PCs This is a required parameter that denotes the backup point code indicator as follows.

Value Meaning

0 NOT_PRESENT1 PRESENT2 BACKUP2

Backup_PC Specifies the backup point code. Optional. Valid values are any available point codes.

Variant This is an optional parameter that denotes the Variant of the SCCP Route as follows:

Value Meaning

1 ITU_882 ITU_923 ITU_964 ANSI_885 ANSI_926 ANSI_967 CHINA

Backup_PC1_PrioritySpecifies the backup PC1 Priority. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value allowed 15. The default is 0.

Backup_PC2 Specifies backup point code 2. Optional. Valid values are any available point codes.

SCCPs





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Backup_PC2_PrioritySpecifies backup PC2 priority. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value allowed 15. The default is 0.

Traffic_Mode This is an optional parameter that denotes the traffic distribution mode as follows:

Value Meaning

1 trfMod_domin3 trfMod_dominShare

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <nnn-nnn-nnn>-SCCPROUTE

Mod SCCPROUTE point_code=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



EXAMPLES To add SCCPs from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/SCCPs context:

add SCCPROUTE point_code:000-000-005Backup_PCs:0Variant (Default:6):Traffic_Mode (Default:1):Command Successful

An add SCCPROUTE command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway;Cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;Cd SCCPs;add SCCPROUTE point_code=000-000-005, Backup_PCs=0, variant=6, Traffic_Mode=1;Cd;


mod Backup_PCs=0


del <000-000-002>-SCCPROUTE

SSNs





4.9 SSNs

The Add SCCPSSN adds SSNs to the SCCP.

NAME Add SCCPSSN

CONTEXT System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/<n>-<nnn-nnn-nnn>-OPCCONFIG/SCCPs/<nnn-nnn-nnn>-SCCPROUTE/SSNs

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SCCPSSN {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

PARAMETERS ssn SubSystem Number. Required. Minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value 255. The Default is 1.

Backup_PCs This is a required parameter that denotes the backup point code Indicator as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No Backup1 Backup2 Backup2

Number_of_DPC Number of destination point codes. Required. Valid values are 0-2.

Description Description. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value allowed 16. The default is Not Defined.

Traffic_Mode This is an optional parameter that denotes the traffic distribution mode as follows:

Value Meaning

1 trfMod_domin (Default)3 trfMod_dominShare

Backup_PC Backup Point Code. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0-0-0, with the maximum value allowed 255-255-255.

DPC_1 Destination Point Code 1. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0-0-0, with the maximum value allowed 255-255-255.

DPC_2 Destination Point Code 2. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0-0-0, with the maximum value allowed 255-255-255.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-SCCPSSN

Mod SCCPSSN ssn=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



SSNs





EXAMPLES To add remote SSNs from the command prompt, at the System/Signaling-Gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/SCCPs/<nnn-nnn-nnn>-SCCPROUTE/SSNs context:

add sccpssnSSN:8Backup_PCs:0Number_of_DPC:1Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): yDescription (Default:Not Defined):testTraffic_Mode (Default:1):1DPC_1 (Default:0):000-000-001Command Successful

An add SCCPSSN command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway;Cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG; Cd SCCPs;Cd <125-109-133>-SCCPROUTE;Cd SSNs;add sccpssn ssn=8, Backup_PCs=0, Number_of_DPC=1,Description (Default:Not Defined)=test, Traffic_Mode (Default:1)=1, DPC_1 (Default:0)=000-000-001;Cd;


mod Description=NewDesc


del 3-SCCPSSN

Global Title Routing





4.10 Global Title Routing

The Add SCCGTT adds global title routing to the signaling gateway.

NAME Add SCCGTT

CONTEXT System/signaling-gateway/Gateways/<n>-<nnn-nnn-nnn>-OPCCONFIG/Global-Title-Routing

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SCCGTT {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

PARAMETERS Format This is a required parameter that identifies the format as follows:

Value Meaning

0 GTF_NO_GLOBAL_TITLE1 GTF_WITH_NOA2 GTF_WITH_TT3 GTF_WITH_TT_NUMPLAN_ENCODING4 GTF_WITH_TT_NUMPLAN_ENCODING_NOA

Address Address. Required. Minimum value allowed is 1, with a maximum value 16. The default is Not Defined.

Encoding_SchemeThis is a required parameter that denotes the encoding scheme as follows:

Value Meaning

0 UNKNOWN_BCD1 BCD_ODD2 BCD_EVEN3 NATIONAL

Nature_of_addressThis is a required parameter that denotes the Nature of Address as follows:

Value Meaning

0 NP_UNKNOWN11 SUBSCRIBER_NUM3 NATIONAL_SIGNIFICANT_NUM4 INTERNATIONAL_NUM

Translation_type Translation Type. Required. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value allowed 255. The default is 0.






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Same_GT_as_IncomingThis is a required parameter that indicates whether the values for the global title outgoing parameters are the same as the global title incoming parameters as follows:

Value Meaning

0 N1 Y

Out_Format This is a required parameter that identifies the FormatType as follows:

Value Meaning

0 GTF_NO_GLOBAL_TITLE1 GTF_WITH_NOA2 GTF_WITH_TT3 GTF_WITH_TT_NUMPLAN_ENCODING4 GTF_WITH_TT_NUMPLAN_ENCODING_NOA

Number_of_pc Number of point code. Required. Valid values are 1-2.

Point_Code Origination Point Code. Required. Valid values are: [0..7]-[0..255]-[0..7].

outRtgInd Routing Indicator. Optional. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 GT1 SSN

Comparing_LengthCompare Length. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value allowed 16. The default is 16.

ssn SSN of the Signaling gateway. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value allowed 255. The default is Not Defined.

Out_Address Address. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value allowed 16. The default is Not Defined.






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Traffic_mode This is an optional parameter that denotes the traffic mode as follows:

Value Meaning

1 trfMod_domin2 trfMod_share

Out_Nature_of_AddressThis is an optional parameter that denotes the Nature of Address as follows:

Value Meaning

0 NP_UNKNOWN11 SUBSCRIBER_NUM3 NATIONAL_SIGNIFICANT_NUM4 INTERNATIONAL_NUM

Out_Encoding_SchemeThis is an optional parameter that denotes the encoding scheme as follows:

Value Meaning

0 UNKNOWN_BCD1 BCD_ODD2 BCD_EVEN3 NATIONAL

Out_Translation_TypeTranslation Type. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value allowed 255. The default is 0.

Numbering_Plan This is a required parameter that denotes the numbering plan as follows:

Value Meaning

0 NA_UNKNOWN11 ISDN_TELEPHONY12 GENUMBERING_PLAN3 DATA_NUMBERING_PLAN14 TELEX_NUMBERING_PLAN15 MARINE_MOBILE_NUMBERING_PLAN6 LAND_MOBILE_NUM17 ISDN_MOBILE_NUMBERING_PLAN8 NATIONAL_NUM_PLAN19 PRIVATE_NUM_PLAN115 NTWK_SPEC






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Out_Numbering_PlanThis is an optional parameter that denotes the Numbering PlanType as follows:

Value Meaning

0 NA_UNKNOWN11 ISDN_TELEPHONY12 GENUMBERING_PLAN3 DATA_NUMBERING_PLAN14 TELEX_NUMBERING_PLAN15 MARINE_MOBILE_NUMBERING_PLAN6 LAND_MOBILE_NUM17 ISDN_MOBILE_NUMBERING_PLAN8 NATIONAL_NUM_PLAN19 PRIVATE_NUM_PLAN115 NTWK_SPEC

PC_2 Additional point code for the signaling gateway. Optional. Valid values are any available point codes.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn>-<n>-<n>-<n>-<n>-<n>-SCCGTT






EXAMPLES To add global title routing from the command prompt, at the System/signaling-gateway/Gateways/1-<00-00-001>-OPCCONFIG/Global-Title-Routing context:

add sccgttFormat:0Address:1Encoding_Scheme:0Nature_of_Address:0Translation_Type:0Same_GT_as_Incoming:1Out_Format:1Number_of_PC:2Point_Code:000-000-001Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): youtRtgInd (Default:0):0Comparing_Length (Default:1):1SSN (Default:1):1Out_Address (Default:Not Defined):Traffic_Mode (Default:1):1Out_Nature_of_Address (Default:Not Defined):Out_Encoding_Scheme (Default:0):0Out_Translation_Type (Default:0):0Numbering_Plan (Default:0):0Out_Numbering_Plan (Default:0):0PC_2 (Default:0):000-000-001Command Successful

An add SCCGTT command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway;Cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;Cd Global-Title-Routing;add SCCGTT format=0, address=1, Encoding_Scheme=0, Nature_of_address=0, Translation_type=0, Same_GT_as_Incoming=1, Out_Format=1, Number_of_PC=2, Point_code=000-000-001, outRtgInd=0, Comparing_Length=1, ssn=3, Out_Address=1, Traffic_Mode=1, Out_Nature_of_Address=0, Out_Encoding_Scheme=0, Out_Translation_Type=0, Numbering_Plan=0, Out_Numbering_Plan=0, PC_2=000-000-001;Cd;


del 0-100000000000000-0-0-1-0-0-SCCGTT

Own Global Title





4.11 Own Global Title

The Add OPCGTT adds a global title to the signaling gateway.

NAME Add OPCGTT

CONTEXT System/signaling-gateway/Gateways/<n>-<nnn-nnn-nnn>-OPCCONFIG/Own-Global-Title

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add OPCGTT {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

PARAMETERS format This is a required parameter that denotes the format as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No Global Title 01 GT NOA 12 GT TT 23 GT Num Encoding 34 GT TT Num Encoding 4

address Address. Required. Minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value allowed 16. The default is Not Defined.

ssn SSN of the Signaling gateway. Required. Minimum value allowed is 1, with the maximum value allowed 255. The default is Not Defined.

Nature_of_AddressThis is an optional parameter that denotes the Nature of Address as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Unknown (Default)1 Subscriber Number 13 National Significant Number 34 International Number 4

Translation_Type Translation Type. Optional. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value allowed 255. The default is 0.

Own Global Title





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Numbering_Plan This is an optional parameter that denotes the Numbering Plan as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Unknown (Default)1 ISDN/Telephony Numbering(E.164) 12 Generic Numbering 23 Data Numbering(X.121) 34 Telex Numbering (F.69) 45 Marine Mobile Numbering (E.211) 56 Land Mobile Numbering(E.212) 67 ISDN Mobile Numbering 78 National Num Plan 89 Private Num Plan 9

Encoding_SchemeThis is an optional parameter that denotes the Encoding Scheme as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Unknown (Default)1 BCD Odd 12 BCD Even 2

OTHER COMMANDS


Mod OPCGTT format=value, address=value, ssn=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}

Del <n>-<nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn>-<n>-OPCGTT



Own Global Title





EXAMPLES To add a global title from the command prompt, at the System/signaling-gateway/Gateways/1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG/Own-Global-Title context:

add opcgttFormat:0Address:1SSN:1Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): yNature_of_Address (Default:0):0Translation_Type (Default:0):0Encoding_Scheme (Default:0):0Numbering_Plan (Default:0):0

An add OPCGTT command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Signaling-Gateway;Cd 1-<000-000-001>-OPCCONFIG;Cd Own-Global-Title;add OPCGTT format=0, address=1, ssn=1, Nature_of_Address=0, Translation_Type=0, Encoding_Scheme=0, Numbering_Plan=0;Cd;


mod Encoding_Scheme=2


del 0-0100000000000000-1-OPCGTT



Alcatel-Lucent Provisioning the Atrium Wireless Media Gateway


SECTION 5 PROVISIONING THE ATRIUM WIRELESS MEDIA GATEWAY

This section of the Command Line Interface Guide explains how to provision a Wireless Media Gateway.

5.1 Lock

The lock command is used to take a resource out of service.

5.2 Unlock

The Unlock command is used to bring a locked resource back into service.

NAME Lock

DESCRIPTION Administratively locks the resource in the current context. You must cd to the resource you want to lock.

SYNTAX lock

OPTIONS No parameters required. The command pertains to the current resource only.

EXAMPLE The following command locks the 11 card:

System/ Nodes/ MSFNodes/ 1-msfnode/ Slots/ 40-1-11card>lock

FILES None.

SEE ALSO Unlock.

NAME Unlock

DESCRIPTION Administratively unlocks the resource in the current context. You must cd to the resource you want to unlock.

SYNTAX unlock

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE The following command unlocks the 11 card in slot 40.

System/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/Slots/40-11card>unlock

FILES No.

SEE ALSO Lock.

Shutdown



Provisioning the Atrium Wireless Media Gateway Alcatel-Lucent


5.3 Shutdown

The shut command is typically used as an intermediate step before using the lock command.

5.4 Reset

The reset command is used for Hardware/Software reset of a resource where applicable.

NAME Shutdown

DESCRIPTION Administratively shutdown a resource.

SYNTAX shutdown

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE The following command shuts down the 11 card:

system/Nodes/MSFNodes/1-msfnodes/slots/40-11card>shutdown

FILES No.

NAME Reset

DESCRIPTION Resets hardware or software for a resource, trunk or line group.

SYNTAX reset [-sw | -grp]

OPTIONS [-sw | -grp] You can enter -sw or -grp to distinguish whether the command is to affect software or a group. Where confusion might exist for a given context, this is required.

EXAMPLE The following command resets a channelized interface card:

system/ Nodes/ MSFNodes/ 10-msfnode/ Slots/ 37-2-Chanintfcard>reset

FILES None.

Speedadd





5.5 Speedadd

This command can be used to help you quickly configure channels on a channelized span. This command is only valid to configure ISUP and BSS channels.

NAME Speedadd

DESCRIPTION Configures channels on a channelized span.

SYNTAX Speedadd {TrunkGrpNumber} {NumChannels} {StartChannelNum} {StartCIC} {StartCKT} {AttenuationProfile} {Loopback} {SpanName}

OPTIONS TrunkGrpNumber-Mandatory ParameterSS7 or BSS group number

NumChannels-Mandatory ParameterNumber of channels user wants to configure

StartChannelNum-Mandatory ParameterNumber of start Channel

StartCIC-Mandatory ParameterCIC id to be assigned to first channel

StartCKT-Mandatory ParameterCKT id to be assigned to first channel

AttenuationProfile-Mandatory ParameterAttenuation profiles for channels

Loopback-Mandatory ParameterLoop back for channels

SpanName-Mandatory ParameterName of span

EXAMPLE The following is the command to channelized and configure all channels of span 5 under the T1 card in slot 21.

System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-MSFNODE/Slots/21-1-T1CARD/5-SPAN>Channelization=2Command completed

System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-MSFNODE/Slots/21-1-T1CARD/5-SPAN> Speedadd TrunkGrpNumber=1600, NumChannels=24, StartChannelNum=1, StartCIC=100, StartCKT=100,AttenuationProfile=0, Loopback=0, SpanName=testCli

FILES None.

Speeddelete





5.6 Speeddelete

This command can be used to help you quickly unconfigure channels on a channelized span. This command is only valid to configure ISUP and BSS channels.

NAME Speeddelete

DESCRIPTION Unconfigures channels on a channelized span.

SYNTAX Speeddelete

OPTIONS None.

EXAMPLE The following is the command to unconfigure all channel of span 5 under T1 card in slot 21

System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-MSFNODE/Slots/21-1-T1CARD/5-SPAN> shutdownallchan

speeddelete

FILES None.

Media Gateway





5.7 Media Gateway

The Add MSFNODE command establishes an instance of a media gateway in the Wireless

Softswitch (WSS).

NAME Add MSFNODE

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add MSFNODE {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

Media Gateway





PARAMETERS WMG_node Identifies the WMG node to be administered. Required. Valid values are 2-64.

Msfnodetype Identifies the type of MSF node to use. Required.

Value Meaning

0 MSF_NODE_STANDARD1 MSF_NODE_RS

Node_Group Specifies the group id of this node. Required.

CM_Slot_7_M_IP_1Specifies the IP Address of Control Card A at slot 7 on this node. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CM_Slot_14_M_IP_1Specifies the IP Address of Control Card B at slot 14 on this node. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CM_Slot_7_SN1_2Specifies serial number 1 for CM card at slot 7. Required. This value can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Default:Not Defined.




ATM_Call_Subnet_MaskSpecifies the subnet mask for call control NIC for WMG. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CC_Subnet_Mask Specifies the subnet mask for call control Ethernet in the WMG. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CC_IP Specifies the floating IP Address of Call Control Traffic Ethernet Interface. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Media Gateway





Mgmt_Intf_IP Specifies the floating IP Address of the Management Traffic Ethernet Interface. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Call_WSS_Router_IPSpecifies the call-control router IP address. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Mgmt_WMG_Router_IPSpecifies the Management Ethernet router IP address. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

WMG_CC_Router_IPSpecifies the Call Control Ethernet router IP address. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Mgmt_NIC_IP Specifies the Management NIC IP address. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Call_NIC_IP Specifies the Call Control NIC IP address. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Sm_Span_Type This is a required parameter that specifies the type of Spans on the Service Matrix cards in this WMG Node as follows:

Value Meaning

0 T11 E1

Pri_ReferenceTypeThis is a required parameter that specifies the type of primary clock reference as follows:

Value Meaning

1 EXT-12 EXT-24 ATM5 CHAN

Pri_Slot Specifies the slot number in which the primary clock reference resides, if the type is not external. Required. Valid values are 1-40. Default: Not Defined.

Pri_Card Specifies the the facility number which provides the primary clock reference, if the type is not external. Required. Valid values are 1-60. Default: Not Defined.

Pri_Facility Specifies the facility number which provides the primary clock reference, if the type is not external. Required. Valid values are 1-60. Default: Not Defined.

Media Gateway





Sec_ReferenceTypeThis is a required parameter that specifies the type of secondary clock reference as follows:

Value Meaning

1 EXT-12 EXT-24 ATM5 CHAN

Sec_Slot Specifies the the slot number in which the secondary clock reference resides, if the type is not external. Required. Valid values are 1-40. Default: Not Defined.

Sec_Card Specifies the card number on which the secondary clock reference resides, if the type is not external. Required. Valid values are 1-8. Default: Not Defined.

Sec_Facility Specifies the facility number which provides the secondary clock reference, if the type is not external. Required. Valid values are 1-60. Default: Not Defined.

Switch_ID A six digit number for recording the msfNode Switch_ID for billing purposes. Required. Default: Not Defined

SVC This is a required parameter that enables accounting for Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC) connections at the WMG Node level as follows:

Value Meaning

1 On2 Off

CBR This is a required parameter that specifies the cell count for SVC CBR connections at the WMG node level as follows:

Value Meaning

1 On2 Off3 Study

Software_Version_ASpecifies the software version for the CM card at slot 7. Required.

Software_Version_BSpecifies the software version for the CM card at slot 14. Required.

Media Gateway





Time_Zone_Index Specifies time zone index defined in Time Zone Distribution table. Required.

cpuMsfNode Identifies the WMG node to be administered. Optional. Optional. Valid values are 1-64. Default: Not Defined.

Name Provides a freeform entry for recording a name for the node. Optional. Valid values are 1-64 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

Contact Provides a freeform entry for recording the contact person for the node. Optional. Valid values are 1-64 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

Location Provides a freeform entry for recording the location of the node. Optional. Valid values are 1-64 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

Node_Location_TypeThis is an optional parameter that specifies the location of the node as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Local1 Remote

site Provides a freeform entry for recording the site where the node is located. Optional. Valid values are 1-32 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

aisle Provides a freeform entry for recording the aisle where the node is located. Optional. Valid values are 1-32 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

frame Provides a freeform entry for recording the frame where the node is located. Optional. Valid values are 1-32 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

shelf Provides a freeform entry for recording the shelf where the node is located. Optional. Valid values are 1-32 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

CLLI_Code Specifies the Common Language Location Code of the WMG node. Optional. Valid values are 1-11 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

MSC_Next_Hop_Router IP address of the router used by the MSC to reach this MSF. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Default_Gateway IP address of the default gateway on the subnet of this MSF node. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Media Gateway





Cntrl_NIC_Card_TypeThis is an optional parameter that specifies the card type of the control NIC as follows:

Value Meaning

0 NA (Default)1 ai2 ci

Gtwy_Cntrl_ProtocolThis is an optional parameter that specifies the gateway control protocol as follows:

Value Meaning

1 EGCP (Default)2 MEGACO

ATM_Address_Prefix Specifies the 26 digits ATM Switch Address Prefix. Optional. Valid values are 0-30 digits. Default: Not Defined.

Vsc_Pkt_Threshold Specifies the threshold for the number of IP packets received with invalid headers within a 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 0

Min_UDP_Port Specifies the lowest value of the usable UDP port range for RTP/RTCP. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 10000, with a maximum of 65535. Default: 10000

Max_UDP_Port Specifies the highest value of the usable UDP port range for RTP/RTCP. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 10000, with a maximum of 65535. Default: 65535

AAL1_Loopback This is an optional parameter that specifies if the AAL1 Resource Loopback is to be Enabled or Disabled for TDM calls on this node as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Disabled (Default)1 Enabled

Fax/Modem_Tone_DetectionThis is an optional parameter that specifies if the Fax/Modem Tone Detection is to be reported for calls on this node as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Tone Detection Off1 Tone Detection On

Media Gateway





EXT-1 This is an optional parameter that specifies the Termination Mode of the primary clock reference which is of type ext1 or ext2 as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Twist1 Coax (Default)

EXT-2 This is an optional parameter that specifies the Termination Mode of the secondary clock reference which is of type ext1 or ext2 as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Twist1 Coax (Default)

CM_Slot_7_CC_IP_1IP Address of the Control Module Card in slot 7. This IP Address is used for call control over Ethernet network. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CM_Slot_14_CC_IP_1IP Address of the Control Module Card in slot 14. This IP Address is used for call control over Ethernet network. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Ethernet_Subnet_MaskSubnet mask of the ethernet subnet of this MSF Node. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CM_Slot_7_M_IP_2IP Address of the Control Module Card in slot 7. This IP Address is used for Management Control over an ATM network. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CM_Slot_14_M_IP_2 IP Address of the Control Module Card in slot 14. This IP Address is used for Management Control over an ATM network. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

CM_Slot_7_CC_IP_2 IP Address of the Control Module Card in slot 7. This IP Address is used for Call Control over an ATM network. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

Media Gateway





CM_Slot_14_CC_IP_2 IP Address of the Control Module Card in slot 14. This IP Address is used for Call Control over an ATM network. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255.

ATM_Subnet_MaskSubnet mask of the ATM (IPoverATM) subnet of this MSF node. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0.0.0.0, with a maximum of 255.255.255.255. Default: Not defined.

PVC This is an optional parameter that specifies the accounting for PVC connections at the WMG Node level as follows:

Value Meaning

1 On2 Off (Default)

SoftPVC This is an optional parameter that specifies the accounting for SoftPVC connections at the WMG Node level as follows:

Value Meaning

1 On2 Off (Default)

UBR This is an optional parameter that specifies the cell count for SVC UBR connections at the WMG node level as follows:

Value Meaning

1 On (Default)2 Off3 Study

NrtVBR This is an optional parameter that specifies the cell count for SVC NrtVBR connections at the WMG node level as follows:

Value Meaning


RtVBR This is an optional parameter that specifies the cell count for SVC RtVBR connections at the WMG node level as follows:

Value Meaning


Media Gateway





CPU_Low_Per_ Specifies the minimum threshold value for CPU load. Optional. Valid values are 0-100. Default: 80.

CPU_High_Per_ Specifies the maximum threshold value for CPU load . Optional. Valid values are 0-100. Default: 90.

Memory_Low_Per Specifies the minimum threshold value for memory usage. Optional. Valid values are 0-100. Default: 80.

Memory_High_Per Specifies the maximum threshold value for memory usage. Optional. Valid values are 0-100. Default: 90.

Interval_in_secondSpecifies the interval in seconds over which to compute the average CPU and Memory utilization. Optional. Valid values are 5-30. Default: 15.

PM_Card Enable/Disable diagnostics for MSC chips on PM card. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 0.

VS_Card Enable/Disable diagnostics for Highways on VS card . Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 0.

Sync_Static_DB_Slot7 Specifies whether to synchronize static database or not for the CM card at slot7. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 1.

Sync_Dynamic_DB_Slot7 Specifies whether to synchronize the dynamic database or not for the CM card at slot 7. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 1.

Download_DB_Slot7 Specifies whether to download the database when the database checksum fails for the CM card at slot 7. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 1.

Force_Download_SW_Slot7Specifies whether to download the software image to the WMG regardless if the checksum passes or not for the CM card at slot 7. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 0.

Software_File_Slot14 Specifies the software control file name for the CM card at slot 14. Optional. Valid values are 0-33 alphanumeric characters. Default: MsfSwControlFile.txt.

Database_File_Slot14Specifies the Database control file name for the CM card at slot 14. Optional. Valid values are 0-33 alphanumeric characters. Default: MsfDbControlFile.txt

Sync_Static_DB_Slot14 Specifies whether to synchronize the static database or not for the CM card at slot 14. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 1.

Media Gateway





Sync_Dynamic_DB_Slot14 Specifies whether to synchronize the dynamic database or not for the CM card at slot 14. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 1.

Download_DB_Slot14 Specifies whether to download the database when the database checksum fails for the CM card at slot 14. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 1.

Force_Download_SW_Slot14 Specifies whether to download the software image to the WMG regardless if the checksum passes or not for the CM card at slot 14. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes. Default: 0.

ALC This is an optional parameter that specifies the Automatic Level Control as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Off (Default)1 On

Sm_Pcm_Encoding This is an optional parameter that specifies the PCM Encoding format used by the SM Card as follows:

Value Meaning

0 ALaw1 MuLaw (Default)

VS_Pcm_EncodingThis is an optional parameter that specifies the PCM Encoding format used by the VS Card as follows:

Value Meaning

0 ALaw1 MuLaw (Default)

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-MSFNODE

Mod MSFNODE WMG_Node=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



Media Gateway





EXAMPLES To enter the media gateway values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway context:

add MSFNODE WMG_Node:2msfNodeType:0Node_Group:0CM_Slot_7_M_IP_1:10.100.1.202CM_Slot_14_M_IP_1:10.100.1.200CM_Slot_7_SN1_2:000007d549c9 CM_Slot_7_SN2_2:000007d53178 CM_Slot_14_SN1_2:000007d51db2 CM_Slot_14_SN2_2:00007d51a50ATM_Call_Subnet_Mask:255.255.255.0CC_Subnet_Mask:255.255.255.0CC_IP:0.0.10.0Mgmt_Intf_IP:1.0.0.0Call_WSS_Router_IP:0.0.0.0Mgmt_WMG_Router_IP:0.0.0.0WMG_CC_Router_IP:0.0.0.0Mgmt_NIC_IP:0.0.0.0Call_NIC_IP:0.0.0.0Sm_Span_Type:1Pri_ReferenceType:1Pri_Slot:1Pri_Card:1Pri_Facility:1Sec_ReferenceType:1Sec_Slot:1Sec_Card:1Sec_Facility:1Switch_ID:123456SVC=2, Software_Version_A:03.00.30.00Software_Version_B:03.00.33.00Time_Zone_Index:1

An add MSFNODE command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway; add MSFNODE WMG_Node=2, msfNodeType=0, Node_Group=0, CM_Slot_7_M_IP_1=10.100.1.202, CM_Slot_14_M_IP_1=10.100.1.200, CM_Slot_7_SN1_2=000007d549c9, CM_Slot_7_SN2_2=000007d53178, CM_Slot_14_SN1_2=000007d51db2, CM_Slot_14_SN2_2=00007d51a50, ATM_Call_Subnet_Mask=255.255.255.0, CC_Subnet_Mask=255.255.255.0, CC_IP=0.0.10.0, Mgmt_Intf_IP=1.0.0.0, Call_WSS_Router_IP=0.0.0.0, Mgmt_WMG_Router_IP=0.0.0.0, WMG_CC_Router_IP=0.0.0.0, Mgmt_NIC_IP=0.0.0.0, Call_NIC_IP=0.0.0.0, Sm_Span_Type=1, Pri_ReferenceType=1, Pri_Slot=1, Pri_Card=1, Pri_Facility=1, Sec_ReferenceType=1, Sec_Slot=1, Sec_Card=1, Sec_Facility=1, Switch_ID=123456, SVC=2, Software_Version_A=03.00.30.00, Software_Version_B=03.00.33.00, Time_Zone_Index=1;cd;

Media Gateway






mod MSFNODE WMG_Node=1, alc=1


del 1-msfnode

Cards





5.8 Cards

The Add T1CARD command establishes an instance of a T1 card to be administrated.

NAME Add T1CARD

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add T1CARD {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

PARAMETERS slot Identifies the slot number of the card to be administered. Required.

card Identifies the card number to be administered. Required.

Group_1 Specifies the protection group in which this card is a member. A value of zero (0) indicates the card is a standalone card and does not participate in any protection switching. Required.

Protecting_Card_1 This is an optional parameter that specifies if the card is a redundant card as follows:

Value Meaning

1 No (Default)2 Yes

Card_Inhibit_Switchover This is an optional parameter that specifies whether protection switching is inhibited for this card as follows:

Value Meaning

1 No (Default)2 Yes

Priority This is an optional parameter that identifies the card protection priority as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Not Applicable1 Low (Default)2 High

Channel_Id Identifies the card protection channel ID.Optional. Valid values are 1-14.

Cards





Group_Inhibit_SwitchoverThis is an optional parameter that specifies whether protection switching is inhibited for this group as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No (Default)2 Yes

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<n>-T1CARD

Mod T1CARD slot=value, card=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



EXAMPLES To enter the T1 card values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-MSFNODE/Slots context:

add T1CARDSlot:35Card:1Group_1:16Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : yProtecting_Card_1 (Default:N) :nCard_Inhibit_Switchover (Default:N) :nPriority (Default:1) :1Channel_Id (Default:0) :1Group_Inhibit_Switchover (Default:N) :nCommand Successful

An add T1CARD command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway; cd 1-MSFNODE; cd Slots;add T1CARD Slot=35, Card=1, Group_1=16, Protecting_Card_1=y, Card_Inhibit_Switchover=n, Priority=1, Channel_Id=1, Group_Inhibit_Switchover=n;cd;


Mod T1CARD slot=34, card=1, priority=2


del 34-1-T1CARD

T1 SPAN





5.9 T1 SPAN

The Add SPAN command establishes a span in the T1 card.

NAME Add SPAN

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-T1CARD

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SPAN {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

T1 SPAN





PARAMETERS Facility_Number Identifies the facility number in which the span resides. Required. Valid values are 1-60.

Sonet_Path_Number Identifies the SONET path number in which the span resides. Required. Valid values are 1-number of defined SONET paths available.

Sub-port_Number Identifies the facility number in which the span resides. Required. Valid values are 1-number of defined facilities available.

Line_Type This is a required parameter that specifies the type of DS1 line to use as follows:

Value Meaning

2 ESF3 D44 E1 No CRC5 E1 CRC8 UNFRAMED9 E1UNFRAMED12 ESFBits13 D4Bits14 E1Bits15 E1 CRCBits

Send_Code This is a required parameter that specifies the type of code that is sent across the DS1 interface as follows:

Value Meaning1 Send No Code2 Send Line Code3 Send Payload Code4 Send Reset Code9 Send AIS10 Send Yellow Alarm11 Send Idle Code

Facilities_Data_LinkThis is a required parameter that specifies the use of the facilities data link as follows:

Value Meaning

2 ANSIT14038 None

Configurable This is a required parameter that denotes whether its a configurable span or not as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Non Configurable1 SPAN Configurable2 Configuring SPAN

T1 SPAN





Name Name given by users. Optional. Valid values are 1-64 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined

Channelization This is an optional parameter that specifies whether the span is channelized or not as follows:

Value Meaning


Line_Coding This is an optional parameter that specifies the type of zero code suppression to use on this line as follows:

Value Meaning

1 JBZS2 B8ZS3 HDB35 AMI8 DS1_LC_NA

Line_Build_Out This is an optional parameter that specifies the line length for short hauls and attenuation for long hauls as follows:

Value Meaning

0 SHORTHAUL0 (Default)1 SHORTHAUL12 SHORTHAUL23 SHORTHAUL34 SHORTHAUL45 LONGHAULA6 LONGHAULB7 LONGHAULC8 LONGHAULD

Status_Change_Trap This is an optional parameter that specifies whether the status change traps should be generated for this span as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No1 Yes (Default)

Loopback_Type This is an optional parameter that specifies the loopback type as follows:

Value Meaning

1 No Loop (Default)2 Payload Loop3 Line Loop5 Inward Loop

T1 SPAN





Allow_Remote_Loop This is an optional parameter that specifies whether the far end is allowed to loop the interface as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Yes2 No (Default)

Use_System_Defaults This is an optional parameter that specifies whether the system default values are to be used for the threshold values as follows:

0 No1 Yes (Default)

ES_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 65.

SES_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Severely Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 10.

SEF_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 2.

UAS_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Unavailable Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 10.

CSS_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Controlled Slip Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 1.

PCV_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Path Coding Violations per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 100000. Default: 13296.

LES_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Line Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 65.

T1 SPAN





BES_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Bursty Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 1.

DM_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Degraded Minutes per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 15. Default: 1.

LCV_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Line Code Violations per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 100000. Default: 13340.

PCM_Multiplex Specifies the multiplex in use, refer to GSM08.08 . Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum value of Not Defined. Default: 0.

Monitor_Perform This is an optional parameter that specifies whether performance monitoring has been enabled as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Enabled2 Disabled

OTHER COMMANDS


Del SPAN <n>-SPAN

Mod SPAN Span_Num=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



T1 SPAN





EXAMPLES To enter the span values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-T1CARD context:

add spanFacility_Number:1Sonet_Path_Number:1Sub-port_Number:1Line_Type:2Line_Coding:2Send_Code:2Facilities_Data_Link:2Configurable:1Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : yName (Default:Not Defined) :test1Channelization (Default:1) :2Line_Build_Out (Default:0) :0Status_Change_Trap (Default:Y) :Loopback_Type (Default:1) :1Allow_Remote_Loop (Default:2) :1Use_System_Defaults (Default:Y) :yES_sec_per_15min (Default:65) :SES_sec_per_15min (Default:10) :SEF_sec_per_15min (Default:2) :UAS_sec_per_15min (Default:10) :CSS_sec_per_15min (Default:1) :PCV_sec_per_15min (Default:13296) :LES_sec_per_15min (Default:65) :BES_sec_per_15min (Default:1) :DM_sec_per_15min (Default:1) :LCV_sec_per_15min (Default:13340) :PCM_Multiplex (Default:0) :Monitor_Perform (Default:2) :1Command Successful

An add SPAN command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 36-1-T1CARD;add span Facility_Number=4, Sonet_Path_Number=1, Sub-port_Number=1, Line_Type=2, Line_Coding=2, Send_Code=2, Facilities_Data_Link=2, Configurable=1, Name=test1, Channelization=2, Line_Build_Out=0, Loopback_Type=1, Allow_Remote_Loop=1, Use_System_Defaults=1, Monitor_Perform=1;cd;


Mod SPAN Span_Num=1, Monitor_Perform=1


del span 2357-span

Voice Server Card (VS Card)





5.10 Voice Server Card (VS Card)

The Add VOICESERVERCARD command establishes an instance of a voice server card.

NAME Add VOICESERVERCARD


ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add VOICESERVERCARD {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

PARAMETERS Slot Identifies the slot number of the card to be administered. Required. Valid values are dependent upon the number of slots available.

Card Identifies the card number to be administered. Required.

Card_Type This is a required parameter that specifies the type of the card as follows:

Value Meaning

24 VSM4a_CARD30 VSM4b_CARD31 VSM4c_CARD

Card_Version This is a required parameter that specifies the card version.

Group_1 This is a required parameter that specifies the protection group in which this card is a member. A value of zero (0) indicates the card is a standalone card and does not participate in any protection switching.






Protecting_Card_1 This is an optional parameter that identifies the card as a redundant card, or a primary card.

Value Meaning

0 No1 Yes

Card_Inhibit_Switchover This is an optional parameter that identifies the if protection switching is allowed.

Value Meaning

0 No1 Yes


Value Meaning

0 Not Applicable1 Low2 High

Channel_Id Identifies the card protection Channel. Optional. A value of 0 indicates Not Applicable.

vsm4cService_type This is an optional parameter that identifies the VSM4c service type.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<n>-VOICESERVERCARD

Mod VOICESERVERCARD slot=value, card=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}








EXAMPLES To enter the channelized interface card values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots context:

add VOICESERVERCARDslot:35card:1Card_Type:30Group_1:34priority:0Channel_Id:0Command Successful

An add CHANINTFCARD command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots;add VOICESERVERCARD slot=35,card=1,Card_Type=6,Group_1=39,priority=0,Channel_Id=0,card_version=2;Cd;


mod VOICESERVERCARD slot=21, card=1, priority=1


del 21-1-VOICESERVERCARD

Gigabit Ethernet Card (GigE Card)





5.11 Gigabit Ethernet Card (GigE Card)

The Add GIGECARD command establishes an instance of a Gigabit Ethernet card in the Wireless

Media Gateway.

NAME Add GIGECARD


ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add GIGECARD {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}









Value Meaning

0 CONTROL1 PACKET_MATRIX2 SERVICE_MATRIX3 DATA_SERVER4 VOICE_SERVER5 ATM_INTERFACE6 CHANNEL_INTERFACE7 DS3_ATM_INTERFACE8 OC3_ATM_INTERFACE9 OC12_ATM_INTERFACE11 T1_CHAN_INTERFACE12 E1_CHAN_INTERFACE13 T3_CHAN_INTERFACE15 OC3_CHAN_INTERFACE17 ECHO_SERVER18 STM1_ATM_INTERFACE19 STM4_ATM_INTERFACE20 STM16_ATM_INTERFACE21 STM1_CHAN_INTERFACE22 STM4_CHAN_INTERFACE23 VSM3_CARD24 VSM4a_CARD25 VSM5_CARD29 VSM3b_CARD30 VSM4b_CARD31 VSM4c_CARD39 CONTROL_MODULE_240 PACKET_MATRIX_241 SERVICE_MATRIX_244 GIGABIT_ETHERNET49 CONTROL_MODULE_350 SERVICE_MATRIX_356 QOC3_CHAN_INTERFACE60 ECHO_SERVER_495 EMS_DEF_VSM2t96 EMS_DEF_VSM2a97 EMS_DEF_VSM298 EMS_DEF_VSM199 CARD_TYPE_UNKNOW100 EMS_DEF_VSM6101 EMS_DEF_VSM6t200 VE65535 EEPROM_CARD_TYPE_FF






Group_1 This is a required parameter that specifies the protection group in which this card is a member. A value of zero (0) indicates the card is a standalone card and does not participate in any protection switching.

Card_Inhibit_Switchover This is an optional parameter that identifies the if protection switching is allowed.

Value Meaning

0 No1 Yes


Value Meaning



Snoop_Port1 This is an optional parameter that specifies which facility/port on this card is to be snooped by the snoop port:

Value Meaning

0 SP1_SNOOP_NONE1 SP1_SNOOP_ON_12 SP1_SNOOP_ON_23 SP1_SNOOP_ON_34 SP1_SNOOP_ON_4

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<n>-GIGECARD

Mod GIGECARD slot=value, card=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}









add GIGECARDslot:35card:1Card_Type:6Group_1:39priority:0Channel_Id:0Command Successful

An add GIGECARD command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots;add GIGECARD slot=35,card=1,Card_Type=6,Group_1=39,priority=0,Channel_Id=0,card_version=2;Cd;


mod GIGECARD slot=21, card=1, priority=1


del 21-1-GIGECARD

ATM Card





5.12 ATM Card

The Add ATMNICCARD command establishes an instance of an ATM card in the Wireless

Media Gateway (WMG).

NAME Add ATMNICCARD


ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add ATMNICCARD {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

ATM Card








Value Meaning

0 CONTROL1 PACKET_MATRIX2 SERVICE_MATRIX3 DATA_SERVER4 VOICE_SERVER5 ATM_INTERFACE6 CHANNEL_INTERFACE7 DS3_ATM_INTERFACE8 OC3_ATM_INTERFACE9 OC12_ATM_INTERFACE11 T1_CHAN_INTERFACE12 E1_CHAN_INTERFACE13 T3_CHAN_INTERFACE15 OC3_CHAN_INTERFACE17 ECHO_SERVER18 STM1_ATM_INTERFACE19 STM4_ATM_INTERFACE20 STM16_ATM_INTERFACE21 STM1_CHAN_INTERFACE22 STM4_CHAN_INTERFACE23 VSM3_CARD24 VSM4a_CARD25 VSM5_CARD29 VSM3b_CARD30 VSM4b_CARD31 VSM4c_CARD39 CONTROL_MODULE_240 PACKET_MATRIX_241 SERVICE_MATRIX_244 GIGABIT_ETHERNET49 CONTROL_MODULE_350 SERVICE_MATRIX_356 QOC3_CHAN_INTERFACE60 ECHO_SERVER_495 EMS_DEF_VSM2t96 EMS_DEF_VSM2a97 EMS_DEF_VSM298 EMS_DEF_VSM199 CARD_TYPE_UNKNOW100 EMS_DEF_VSM6101 EMS_DEF_VSM6t200 VE65535 EEPROM_CARD_TYPE_FF

ATM Card






Value Meaning



OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<n>-ATMNICCARD

Mod ATMNICCARD slot=value, card=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}




add ATMNICCARDslot:35card:1Card_Type:6priority:0Channel_Id:0Command Successful

An add GIGECARD command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots;add ATMNICCARD slot=35,card=1,Card_Type=6,priority=0,Channel_Id=0,card_version=2;Cd;


mod ATMNICCARD slot=21, card=1, priority=1


del 21-1-ATMNICCARD

Channelized Interface Card (CI Card)





5.13 Channelized Interface Card (CI Card)

The Add CHANINTFCARD command establishes an instance of a channelized interface card in

the Wireless Media Gateway (WMG).

NAME Add VOICESERVERCARD


ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add VOICESERVERCARD {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}









Value Meaning

0 CONTROL1 PACKET_MATRIX2 SERVICE_MATRIX3 DATA_SERVER4 VOICE_SERVER5 ATM_INTERFACE6 CHANNEL_INTERFACE7 DS3_ATM_INTERFACE8 OC3_ATM_INTERFACE9 OC12_ATM_INTERFACE11 T1_CHAN_INTERFACE12 E1_CHAN_INTERFACE13 T3_CHAN_INTERFACE15 OC3_CHAN_INTERFACE17 ECHO_SERVER18 STM1_ATM_INTERFACE19 STM4_ATM_INTERFACE20 STM16_ATM_INTERFACE21 STM1_CHAN_INTERFACE22 STM4_CHAN_INTERFACE23 VSM3_CARD24 VSM4a_CARD25 VSM5_CARD29 VSM3b_CARD30 VSM4b_CARD31 VSM4c_CARD39 CONTROL_MODULE_240 PACKET_MATRIX_241 SERVICE_MATRIX_244 GIGABIT_ETHERNET49 CONTROL_MODULE_350 SERVICE_MATRIX_395 EMS_DEF_VSM2t96 EMS_DEF_VSM2a97 EMS_DEF_VSM298 EMS_DEF_VSM199 CARD_TYPE_UNKNOW100 EMS_DEF_VSM6101 EMS_DEF_VSM6t200 VE65535 EEPROM_CARD_TYPE_FF







Value Meaning



OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD

Mod CHANINTFCARD slot=value, card=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}




add CHANINTFCARDslot:35card:1Card_Type:6priority:0Channel_Id:0Command Successful

An add CHANINTFCARD command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots;add CHANINTFCARD slot=35,card=1,Card_Type=6,priority=0,Channel_Id=0,card_version=2;Cd;


mod CHANINTFCARD slot=21, card=1, priority=1


del 21-1-CHANINTFCARD

OC3 Time Division Multiplex (TDM) CARD





5.14 OC3 Time Division Multiplex (TDM) CARD

The Add OC3TDMCARD command establishes an instance of an OC3 TDM card in the Wireless

Media Gateway (WMG).

NAME Add OC3TDMCARD

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add OC3TDMCARD {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}






PARAMETERS Card Identifies the card number to be administered. Required.


Value Meaning

0 CONTROL1 PACKET_MATRIX2 SERVICE_MATRIX3 DATA_SERVER4 VOICE_SERVER5 ATM_INTERFACE6 CHANNEL_INTERFACE7 DS3_ATM_INTERFACE8 OC3_ATM_INTERFACE9 OC12_ATM_INTERFACE11 T1_CHAN_INTERFACE12 E1_CHAN_INTERFACE13 T3_CHAN_INTERFACE15 OC3_CHAN_INTERFACE17 ECHO_SERVER18 STM1_ATM_INTERFACE19 STM4_ATM_INTERFACE20 STM16_ATM_INTERFACE21 STM1_CHAN_INTERFACE22 STM4_CHAN_INTERFACE23 VSM3_CARD24 VSM4a_CARD25 VSM5_CARD29 VSM3b_CARD30 VSM4b_CARD31 VSM4c_CARD39 CONTROL_MODULE_240 PACKET_MATRIX_241 SERVICE_MATRIX_244 GIGABIT_ETHERNET49 CONTROL_MODULE_350 SERVICE_MATRIX_395 EMS_DEF_VSM2t96 EMS_DEF_VSM2a97 EMS_DEF_VSM298 EMS_DEF_VSM199 CARD_TYPE_UNKNOW100 EMS_DEF_VSM6101 EMS_DEF_VSM6t200 VE65535 EEPROM_CARD_TYPE_FF

Card_Version Specifies the card version. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 2.

Group_1 Specifies the protection group in which this card is a member. A value of zero (0) indicates the card is a standalone card and does not participate in any protection switching. Required. Valid values are 0-14.






Protecting_Card_1 Specifies whether the card acts as a redundant or not. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes.


Value Meaning



Group_Inhibit_SwitchoverSpecifies whether protection switching is inhibited for this group. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<n>OC3TDMCARD

Mod OC3TDMCARD slot=value, card=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}








EXAMPLES To enter the OC3 TDM card values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD context:

add OC3TDMCARD Card:1Card_Type:15Group_1:1Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : yProtecting_Card_1 (Default:N) :1Priority (Default:1) :0Channel_Id (Default:0) :0Group_Inhibit_Switchover (Default:N) :Command Successful

An add OC3TDMCARD command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD;add OC3TDMCARD Card=1, Card_Type=15, Group_1=1, Protecting_Card_1=1, Priority=0, Channel_Id=0;Cd;


Mod OC3TDMCARD slot=21, card=1, priority=2


del 21-1-OC3TDMCARD

TDM SONET Facility





5.15 TDM SONET Facility

The Add TDMSONETFACILITY command establishes a TDM SONET facility in the OC3 TDM

card.

NAME Add TDMSONETFACILITY

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add TDMSONETFACILITY {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

PARAMETERS MsfCardNum Identifies the card number to be administered. Required.

Facility Identifies the facility number to administer. Required.

Medium_Type This variable identifies whether a SONET or an SDH signal is used across this interface as follows:

Value Meaning

1 SONET2 SDH

Sec_System_Defaults This is a required parameter that specifies whether the MSF nodes default values are to be used for the threshold values as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No1 Yes

Line_System_Defaults This is a required parameter that specifies whether the MSF nodes default values are to be used for the threshold values as follows:

Value Meaning1 No2 Yes

sonmedmsfNode The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not defined. Required. Default: Not Defined

name Name given by users. Optional. A valid value is 1-64 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

Line_Coding This variable describes the line coding for this interface. The Non-Return to Zero (NRZ) and the Return to Zero are used for optical SONET/SDH signals. Optional.

TDM SONET Facility





Line_Type This variable describes the line type for this interface. Required. The only valid value you can enter is 2 for ShortSingleMode.

Send_Code This is a required parameter that indicates what type of code is being sent across the SONET interface by the device as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Send No Code (Default)2 Send AIS

Loopback_Type This is an optional parameter that indicates the current loopback state of the SONET/SDH interface as follows:

Value Meaning

1 No Loop (Default)2 Facility Loop

Sec_ES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

Sec_SES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Severely Errored Second per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

SEFS_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

Sec_CV_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Code Violations per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

Line_ES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

Line_SES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Severely Errored Second per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

Line_CV_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Code Violations per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

TDM SONET Facility





UAS_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Unavailable Seconds per 15 minutes. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del TDMSONETFACILITY msffacility=value

Mod TDMSONETFACILITY facility=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



TDM SONET Facility





EXAMPLES To enter the TDM SONET facility values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD/21-1-OC3TDMCARD context:

Add TDMSONETFACILITYFacility:1Medium_Type:1Sanx_Sonet_Medium_Admin_U:0Sec_System_Defaults:ySec_ES_sec_per_15min:12Sec_SES_sec_per_15min:2SEFS_sec_per_15min:2Sec_CV_sec_per_15min:382Line_System_Defaults:1Line_ES_sec_per_15min:12Line_SES_sec_per_15min:3Line_CV_sec_per_15min:15UAS_sec_per_15min:10MsfCardNum:1Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : yName (Default:Not Defined) :test6Line_Type (Default:2) :Line_Coding (Default:4) :Send_Code (Default:1) :Loopback_Type (Default:1) :Command Successful

An add TDMSONETFACILITY command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD;add TDMSONETFACILITY Facility=1, Medium_Type=1, Sanx_Sonet_Medium_Admin_U=0, Sec_System_Defaults=y, Sec_ES_sec_per_15min=12, Sec_SES_sec_per_15min=2, SEFS_sec_per_15min=2, Sec_CV_sec_per_15min=382, Line_System_Defaults=1, Line_ES_sec_per_15min=12, Line_SES_sec_per_15min=3, Line_CV_sec_per_15min=15, UAS_sec_per_15min=10, MsfCardNum=1, Name=test6;Cd;


mod TDMSONETFACILITY facility=1, name=test


del 1-TDMSONETFACILITY

Enable DS3 SONETPATH





5.16 Enable DS3 SONETPATH

The Mod SONETPATH command enables DS3 in the OC3 TDM card.

NAME Mod SONETPATH

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX


mod SONETPATH path_id=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}








PARAMETERS Channelization Indicates whether this SONET path is channelized or unchannelized as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Disabled2 EnabledDs33 EnabledVT

sonPathVTGrp1 Indicates the VT group type. Optional. 0 indicates Not Applicable, 1 indicates VT1.5.







Send_Code This required variable indicates what type of code is being sent across the SONET Path interface by the device as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Send No Code2 Send AIS

System_Defaults Specifies whether to use the MSF nodes default values for the threshold values as follows:

Value Meaning

1 No2 Yes

ES_sec_per_15min Threshold value for number of Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 900. Default: 12.

SES_sec_per_15min Threshold value for number of Severely Errored Second per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 900. Default: 3.






CV_sec_per_15min Threshold value for number of Code Violations per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 900. Default: 15.

UAS_sec_per_15min Threshold value for number of Unavailable Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 900. Default: 10.

EXAMPLES To modify the SONET facility values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD/21-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY context:

mod sonetpath path_id=1, channelization=2Command Successful

A mod command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD; cd 1-TDMSONETFACILITY ;cd 359695360-SONETPATH;mod channelization=2;Cd;

Enable DS1 Channelization for DS3





5.17 Enable DS1 Channelization for DS3

The Mod EMBEDDEDDSX3 command allows you to enable DS1 channelization for a DS3.

NAME Mod EMBEDDEDDSX3

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY/<n>-SONETPATH

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX


Mod EMBEDDEDDSX3 ds3LineInd=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}








PARAMETERS Line_Coding Specifies the type of zero code suppression to use on this line. Optional. The only valid value is 2 for B3ZS.


Value Meaning

1 No Loopback3 Line Loopback

Channelization This is an optional parameter that specifies whether the DS3 is channelized or not as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Disabled2 Enabled DS1


Value Meaning

2 M234 Cbit Parity

Line_Build_Out This is an optional parameter that specifies the line length buildout as follows:

Value Meaning

0 0-225 feet1 225-450 feet

Send_Code This is required parameter that specifies the type of code that is sent across the DS3 interface as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Send No Code7 Send AIS8 Send Yellow Alarm

Systems_Defaults Specifies whether to use the MSF nodes default values for the threshold values. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes.

PES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of P-bit Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 25.






PSES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of P-bit Severely Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 4.

SEFS_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 2.

UAS_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Unavailable Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 10.

LES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Line Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 25.

LCV_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of Line Coding Violations per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 387.

PCV_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of P-bit Coding Violations per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 382.

CCV_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of C-bit Coding Violations per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 382.

CES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of C-bit Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 25.

CSES_sec_per_15minThreshold value for number of C-bit Severely Errored Seconds per 15 minutes. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 4.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del EMBEDDEDDSX3 ds3LineInd=value






EXAMPLES To modify the values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD/21-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY/3-sonetpath context:

Mod EMBEDDEDDSX3 ds3LineInd=1, channelization=2Command Successful

A mod EMBEDDEDDSX3 command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD; cd 1-TDMSONETFACILITY ;cd 359695360-SONETPATH; cd 1-EMBEDDEDDSX3;channelization=2;Cd;

Enable DS0 Channelization for UNAS DS1





5.18 Enable DS0 Channelization for UNAS DS1

The Mod SPAN command enables DS0 channelization for a UNAS DS1.

NAME Mod SPAN

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY/<n>-SONETPATH/<n>-EMBEDDEDDSX3

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX


Mod SPAN Span_Num=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}








PARAMETERS Allow_Remote_LoopSpecifies whether the far end is allowed to loop the interface. Optional. Enter 2 for No, or 1 for Yes.


Value Meaning

2 ESF3 D44 E15 E1 CRC8 Unframed9 E1 Unframed12 ESFBits13 D4Bits14 E1Bits15 E1CRC Bits

Line_Coding This is an optional parameter that specifies the type of zero code suppression to use on this line as follows:

Value Meaning

1 JBZS2 B8ZS3 HDB35 AMI8 Not Applicable

Send_Code This is a required parameter that specifies the type of code that is sent across the DS1 interface as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Send No Code2 Send Line Code3 Send Payload Code4 Send Reset Code9 Send AIS10 Send Yellow Alarm11 Send Idle Code


Value Meaning

1 No Loop2 Payload Loop3 Line Loop5 Inward Loop

Facilities_Data_LinkSpecifies the use of the facilities data link. Required. Enter 2 for ANSIT1403, or 8 for None.






Status_Change_Trap This is an optional parameter that specifies whether the status change traps should be generated for this span as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No1 Yes (Default)

Monitor_Perform This is an optional parameter that specifies whether performance monitoring has been enabled as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Enabled2 Disabled

Channelization This is an optional parameter that specifies whether the span is channelized or not as follows:

Value Meaning


SES_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Severely Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 10.

SEF_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 2.

ES_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 65.

UAS_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Unavailable Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 10.

CSS_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Controlled Slip Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 1.






PCV_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Path Coding Violations per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 100000. Default: 13296.

LES_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Line Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 65.

BES_sec_per_15min Specifies the threshold value for the number of Bursty Errored Seconds per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 900. Default: 1.

DM_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Degraded Minutes per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 15. Default: 1.

LCV_sec_per_15minSpecifies the threshold value for the number of Line Code Violations per 15 minute interval. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum value of 100000. Default: 13340.

PCM_Multiplex Specifies the multiplex in use, refer to GSM08.08 . Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum value of Not Defined. Default: 0.

Use_System_DefaultsSpecifies whether the system default values are to be used for the threshold values. Optional. Enter 0 for No, or 1 for Yes.

Line_Build_Out This is an optional parameter that specifies the line length for short hauls and attenuation for long hauls as follows:

Value Meaning

0 SHORTHAUL0 (Default)1 SHORTHAUL12 SHORTHAUL23 SHORTHAUL34 SHORTHAUL45 LONGHAULA6 LONGHAULB7 LONGHAULC8 LONGHAULD

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-SPAN






EXAMPLES To modify the values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD/21-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY/3-sonetpath/1-EMBEDDEDDSX3 context:

mod SPAN Span_Num=3701, Channelization=2Command Successful


Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD; cd 1-TDMSONETFACILITY ;cd 359695360-SONETPATH; cd 1-EMBEDDEDDSX3; cd 3701-SPAN;mod Channelization=2;Cd;

ISUP CIC Partitioning





5.19 ISUP CIC Partitioning

The Add ISUPCICPARTITION command adds ISUP CIC partitioning.

NAME Add ISUPCICPARTITION

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/ISUP-CIC/Static-ISUP-CIC

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add ISUPCICPARTITION {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

PARAMETERS WSS_Num WSS Number. Required.

DPC ISUP Destination Point Code. Required. The minimum allowed value is 0-0-0, with a maximum of 255-255-255.

Start_CIC Start CIC. Required. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 65535. Default: Not Defined.

End_CIC End CIC. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 65535. Default: Not Defined.

Type Specifies the type of partitioning. Optional. 1 indicates ISUP and 2 indicates BICC. Default: 1.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del ISUPCICPARTITION WSS_Num=value, DPC=value, Start_CIC=value

Mod ISUPCICPARTITION WSS_Num=value, DPC=value, Start_CIC=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



EXAMPLES To enter the ISUPCICPARTITION values from the command prompt, at the System/Office-Parameters/ISUP-CIC/Static-ISUP-CIC context:

add ISUPCICPARTITIONWSS_Num:1DPC:000-000-003Start_CIC:1End_CIC:1000Type:2Command Successful

An add ISUPCICPARTITION command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Office-Parameters; cd ISUP-CIC;add ISUPCICPARTITION WSS_Num=1, DPC=000-000-003, Start_CIC=1, End_CIC=1000, Type=2;cd;

Assign DS0 Channels to BSS





5.20 Assign DS0 Channels to BSS

The Mod BSSCHANNEL command allows you to assign DS0 channels to a BSS.

NAME Mod BSSCHANNEL

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY/<n>-SONETPATH/<n>-EMBEDDEDDSX3/<n>-SPAN

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX


Mod BSSCHANNEL channel=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}



PARAMETERS Trunk_Group_NumberSpecifies the channel’s system trunk group number. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 11, with a maximum of 9999. Default: Not Defined.

circuit_Id Specifies the Circuit ID for ordering trunks in the trunk group. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of 65535. Default: Not Defined.

isup_CIC Specifies the CIC for ISUP Circuits. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 65535. Default: Not Defined.

loopbackType This is an optional parameter that specifies the loopback type of the DS0 channel as follows:

Value Meaning

0 None1 Payload2 Line3 Local

attenuation This is an optional parameter that specifies the channel attenuation as follows:

Value Meaning

0 0 db1 -3 db2 -6 db3 -12db

Span_Type Indicates the span type. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: Not Defined

Assign DS0 Channels to BSS





OTHER COMMANDS


del <nnn>-BSSCHANNEL

EXAMPLES To assign DS0 channels to a BSS values from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD/21-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY/3-sonetpath/1-EMBEDDEDDSX3/61-span context:

mod bsschannel channel_number=2, trunk_group_number=45, circuit_id=2, isup_cic=2, loopbacktype=0, attenuation=0, span_type=1

A mod bsschannel command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD; cd 1-TDMSONETFACILITY ;cd 359695360-SONETPATH; cd 1-EMBEDDEDDSX3; cd 3701-SPAN;mod bsschannel channel_number=2, trunk_group_number=45, circuit_id=2, isup_cic=2, loopbacktype=0, attenuation=0, span_type=1;cd;

Assign DS0 Channels to ISUP





5.21 Assign DS0 Channels to ISUP

The Mod SS7CHANNEL command allows you to assign DS0 channels to ISUP.

NAME Mod SS7CHANNEL

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY/<n>-SONETPATH/<n>-EMBEDDEDDSX3/<n>-SPAN

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX


Mod SS7CHANNEL channel=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}





isup_CIC Specifies the CIC for ISUP Circuits. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 1, with a maximum of 65535. Default: Not Defined.

loopbackType This is an optional parameter that specifies the loopback type of the DS0 channel as follows:

Value Meaning

0 None1 Payload2 Line3 Local

attenuation This is an optional parameter that specifies the channel attenuation as follows:

Value Meaning

0 0 db1 -3 db2 -6 db3 -12db

Span_Type Indicates the span type. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: Not Defined

Assign DS0 Channels to ISUP





OTHER COMMANDS


Del <nnn>-SS7CHANNEL

EXAMPLES To assign DS0 channels to ISUP from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD/21-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY/3-sonetpath/1-EMBEDDEDDSX3/61-span context:

mod ss7channel channel_number=2, trunk_group_number=1, circuit_id=2, isup_cic=2, loopbacktype=0, attenuation=0, span_type=1

A mod SS7CHANNEL command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD; cd 1-TDMSONETFACILITY ;cd 359695360-SONETPATH; cd 1-EMBEDDEDDSX3; cd 3702-SPAN;mod ss7channel channel_number=2, trunk_group_number=1, circuit_id=2, isup_cic=2, loopbacktype=0, attenuation=0, span_type=1;cd;

Enable VT on DS3





5.22 Enable VT on DS3

The Mod allows you to enable VT on DS3.

NAME Mod

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY/<n>-SONETPATH

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX

Mod {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

PARAMETERS Channelization Indicates whether this SONET path is channelized or unchannelized as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Disabled2 EnabledDs33 EnabledVT

EXAMPLES To enable VT on DS3 from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/21-1-CHANINTFCARD/21-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY/3-sonetpath context:

mod CHANNELIZATION=3Command Successful


Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD; cd 1-TDMSONETFACILITY/1-SONETPATH;mod CHANNELIZATION=3;Cd;

Enable DS0 Channelization (Under VT Group)





5.23 Enable DS0 Channelization (Under VT Group)

The Mod command allows you to enable DS0 channelization under the VT group.

NAME Mod

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY/<n>-SONETPATH/<n>-VT_GROUP1/<n>-SONETVT/<n>-SPAN

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX

Mod {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

PARAMETERS Channelization This is an optional parameter that specifies the channelization as follows:

Value Meaning

1 Disabled2 Enabled DS0

EXAMPLES To enable DS0 channelization under the VT group from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/1-msfnode/Slots/25-1-CHANINTFCARD/25-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY/2-SONETPATH/1-VTGROUP/1-SONETVT/1377-SPAN context:

mod Channelization=2Command Successful


cd Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway;cd 1-MSFNODE/Slots;cd 25-1-CHANINTFCARD/25-1-OC3TDMCARD/1-TDMSONETFACILITY;cd 2-SONETPATH/1-VTGROUP/1-SONETVT;cd 1377-SPAN;mod Channelization=2;cd;

Assign DS0 Channels to CALEA





5.24 Assign DS0 Channels to CALEA

The Mod CALEACHANNEL command allows you to assign DS0 channels to CALEA.

NAME Mod CALEACHANNEL

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway/<n>-MSFNODE/Slots/<n>-<n>-CHANINTFCARD/<n>-<n>-OC3TDMCARD/<n>-TDMSONETFACILITY/<n>-SONETPATH/<n>-VT_GROUP1/<n>-SONETVT/<n>-SPAN

MOD COMMAND SYNTAX


mod CALEACHANNEL channel=value, {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}


mod {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2..}



casProfId Specifies CAS Profile Id. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: 0.

channelType Indicates the channel type. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: Not Defined.

span_type Indicates the span type. Optional. The minimum allowed value is 0, with a maximum of Not Defined. Default: Not Defined.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del ISUPCICPARTITION wsIsupNum =value, isupDPC=value, startIsupCic=value

Assign DS0 Channels to CALEA





EXAMPLES To assign DS0 channels to CALEA from the command prompt, at the System/Nodes/Wireless-Media-Gateway/Spatial-Media-Gateway context:

mod CALEACHANNEL channel=1, Trunk_Group_Number=20, circuit_Id=1, casProfId=0, channelType=0, span_type=0

A mod CALEACHANNEL command as it might appear in a batch file:

Cd;Cd Nodes; cd Wireless-Media-Gateway ; cd Spatial-Media-Gateway ; cd 1-MSFNODE;Cd Slots; cd 38-1-CHANINTFCARD; cd 38-1-OC3TDMCARD; cd 1-TDMSONETFACILITY ;cd 359696384-SONETPATH; cd 1-VT_GROUP1; cd 1-SONETVT; cd 3729-SPAN;mod CALEACHANNEL channel=1, Trunk_Group_Number=20, circuit_Id=1, casProfId=0, channelType=0, span_type=0;cd;



Alcatel-Lucent Provisioning Atrium Routing and Translation


SECTION 6 PROVISIONING ATRIUM ROUTING AND TRANSLATION

This section of the Command Line Interface Guide explains how to set up routing and translations in the Atrium Wireless Soft Switch (WSS).

6.1 Prefix Tree

The prefix tree commands are used to maintain the numeric identifiers for prefix translators and to assign names to translators. The prefix translator recognizes and standardizes prefixes and dialed numbers. Its main functions include:

• Dialed digit recognition

• Dialed digit classification

• Call termination screening

• Routing

• Custom digit formatting and internationalization of numbers for HLR queries

• MSISDN Routing and Translations function—During prefix translation, call control finds a particular called number as an MSISDN that requires an HLR query. An analyzed info message is automatically sent to the Subscriber Profile Manager (SPM) for making an SRI query. (The system provides one translator, 203-PREFIX, that is used to route all HLR traffic.)

• MSRN Translations and Routing function—If called number is MSRN, the call is terminated to a mobile on a CCM card specified in the configuration.

Within each prefix tree are PREFIXFENCE resources that translate the digit strings within the prefix tree. (See “Prefix Translation.”)

NAME Prefix Tree

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/ Prefix-Translation>

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add PREFIX Translator_id=<value>, [Name=<value>]

PARAMETERS Translator_id The number to assign to this translator. Required. Must be in the range 1 through 255. For the standard prefix tree, this must be “1.” For the international prefix translator, it must be “202.”

Name Optional name or description to assign to the translator.

Prefix Tree



Provisioning Atrium Routing and Translation Alcatel-Lucent


OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the resource context:

Del <n>-PREFIX

Mod PREFIX Translator_id=<value>, [Name=<value>]

From inside the resource context you can only change the Name:

Mod Name=<value>

EXAMPLES Adding a prefix translator at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/ Wireless-Translation/Prefix-Translation>add PREFIX Translator_id=1, Name=Prefix tree sample text

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters;cd Routing-and-Translation; cd Wireless-Translation; cd Prefix-Translation;add PREFIX Translator_id=1, Name= Prefix tree example description text;cd;

Deleting a prefix translator that has a translator_identifier of 199:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/ Wireless-Translation/Prefix-Translation>del 199-PREFIX

Prefix Translation and HLR Considerations





6.2 Prefix Translation and HLR Considerations

This topic explains how to configure a Prefix Translation resource and provides information about HLR prefix translations.

6.2.1 Configuring a Prefix Translation Resource (PREFIXFENCE)For each prefix within a prefix tree translator, you must give the translation instructions for the digit strings to be translated. To provision a digit prefix, the user must first complete the following tasks:

• Provision a feature carrier group ID

• Provision a translation group

• Provision a termination type

NAME Prefix Translation

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/Prefix-Translation/1-PREFIX

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add PREFIXFENCE {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2,. . . }

PARAMETERS Digit_String Specifies a prefix digit string, up to 32 digits in length. This is a required entry with a value in the range 1 through 32.

Translation_GroupSpecifies the national translation group number to use for calls using this prefixfence. This is a required value in the range of 1 through 65535. The default is 1.

Digit_String_Type This is a required value that denotes the type of string being translated, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 DT_SUBSCRIBER2 DT_SUBSCRIBER_BARGE_IN4 DT_NATIONAL9 DT_INTERNATIONAL10 DT_INTERNATIONAL_OPERATOR_REQ11 DT_OPERATOR_REQ_NO_ADDRESS12 DT_CUT_THRU_TO_CARRIER13 DT_950_CAL14 DT_TEST_LINE_TEST_CALL15 DT_PUBLIC_FEATURE_CODE16 DT_N11_SERVICE_CODE






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

17 DT_EMERGENCY_CODE18 DT_SAC_TOLL_FREE19 DT_SAC_70020 DT_SAC_PC21 DT_SAC_PREMIUM22 DT_1_PLUS_PREFIX23 DT_NATIONAL_OPERATOR_REQ24 DT_LOCAL_DA25 DT_TOLL_DA27 DT_CARRIER_OPER_REQ_NO_ADDR28 DT_INTERNATIONAL_OPER_REQ_NO_ADDR29 DT_SPEED_CALL_CODE30 DT_EXTENSION_NUMBER_CODE31 DT_PUBLIC_ACCESS_CODE33 DT_OPERATOR_REQ34 DT_NATIONAL_OPER_NO_ADDR35 DT_CUSTOMER_SUPPORT36 DT_WPS37 DT_GETS

Min_Digit_Cnt The minimum number of digits expected. Required value, in the range 1 through 32. Defaults to 10.

Termination_Type Specifies the termination type defined by the service provider to be used for call screening. Required value in the range 1 through 19.

Service_Index Specifies the service type. Required value that can be 1 for SI_NONE or 101 for SI_NCSI.

Protocol_Type Specifies type of protocol. Required. Must be 1 for CAMEL or 2 for INAP.

Add_Leading_Digits_TypeIndicates whether a system-defined or a calling party NXX is used. If system-defined, the value is 0; for NPA-NXX enter 1. Required.

Numbering_Plan Specifies the numbering plan used. Required. Values are:

Value Meaning

8 NDARD9 NUM_PLAN_PRIVATE

Remove_Leading_DigitsSpecifies the number of leading digits to remove from the original digit string. Required value in the range 0 through 32. Defaults to 0.






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Numbering_Type Specifies the numbering type used. Required. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 NUM_TYPE_UNKNOWN1 NUM_TYPE_INTERNATIONAL2 NUM_TYPE_NATIONAL3 NUM_TYPE_NETWORK4 NUM_TYPE_SUBSCRIBER6 NUM_TYPE_ABBREVIATED

Digits Specifies the digits. Required value in the range 0 through 16.

Carrier_ID Specifies the CIC assigned to this NPA-NXX or digit stream. Required entry.

Networklistsindex Network list index. Required with a value of 0.

Route_Action Specifies the type of action to be taken when processing this digit string. Required. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 INVALID_TYPE1 ROUTE_INDEX2 CAUSE_CODE6 CALLING_PREFIX_TRANS7 CALLING_IMSI_PREFIX_TRANS8 NO_MOBILITY_ROUTE_INDEX9 REPEAT_PREFIX_TRANS10 VLR_CHECK_PREFIX_TRANS11 NO_VLR_CHECK_PREFIX_TRANS

Max_Digit_Cnt Maximum number of digits expected for this entry. Optional value in the range from 1 through 32. The default is 11.

Default_Handling Default handling. Optional. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 CONT_CALL1 REL_CALL

Service_key Service Key unique to a particular SCP. Optional. Values must be in the range 0 through 2147483647. The default is 0.

Name Optional user-defined numeric identifier for the prefix translation. It can be a value in the range 1 through 32.

Add_Leading_DigitsDigit string to add after the number of leading digits has been removed from the original digits. Optional.






Echo Cancellation Indicates how echo cancellation processing will be accomplished, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 As trunk is configured.1 Enabled2 Disabled

Version Optional value that can be used to document the version.

Route_Index Optional value that gives the cause code or route index to use to process the call based on the action type.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside its context:

Del PREFIXFENCE <n>-prefixfence

Mod PREFIXFENCE Digit_String=<value>, Translation_Group=<value>, Digit_String_Type=<value>, { parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

From inside the resource context: Mod {parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

EXAMPLES To enter a PREFIXFENCE interactively while in the prefix context:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/Prefix-Translation/1-PREFIX>add PREFIXFENCE

Digit_String: 10Translation_Group: 1Digit_String_Type: 4Min_Digit_Cnt: 11Termination_Type: 1Service_Index: 1Protocol_Type: 1Add_Leading_Digits_Type :0Numbering_Plan: 1Remove_Leading_Digits :0Numbering_Type: 0Digits: 0Carrier_Id: 0002networkListsIndex: 0Route_Action: 0

Command Successful






EXAMPLES(CONT.)

An add prefixfence command as it might appear in a batch file:

cd;cd Office-Parameters; cd Routing-and-Translation; cd Wireless-Translation; cd Prefix-Translation; cd 1-PREFIX;add PrefixFENCE Digit_String=10,

Translation_Group=1, Digit_String_Type=4, Min_Digit_Cnt=11, Termination_Type=1, Service_Index=1, Protocol_Type=1, Add_Leading_Digits_Type=0, Numbering_Plan=1, Remove_Leading_Digits=0,Numbering_Type=0, Digits=0, Carrier_Id=0002, NetworkListsIndex=0,Route_Action=0;

cd;

Deleting a Prefixfence resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/Prefix-Translation/3-PREFIX>Del 10-1-4-PREFIXFENCE

Changing the Route_Action to 1:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/Prefix-Translation/3-PREFIX>Mod PREFIXFENCE Digit_String=10, Translation_Group=1, Digit_String_Type=4, Route_Action=1






6.2.2 HLR Considerations for 203-PREFIX ResourceThe system provides one translator, 203-PREFIX, that is used to route HLR traffic. Calls that require HLR communications always use the HLR prefix tree.

For HLR prefix trees, only the parameters listed below are used. Please note that some parameters are required for the 203-PREFIX resource used for HLR translation that are not required for other PREFIXFENCE resources. Also note that some values are mandatory for the HLR PREFIXFENCE resource.

• Digit_String (required)

• Digit_String_Type (required)

• Min_Digit_Cnt (required)

• Termination_Type (required)

• Service_Index (required)

• Protocol Type (required)

• Numbering_Plan (must be ISDN)

• Remove Leading Digits (optional)

• Numbering_Type (must be International)

• Digits (required)

• Carrier ID (must be 0000)

• Route Action (required)

• Country Code is not used.

• Max_Digit_Cnt (required)

• Default_Handling (required)

• Service Key (required)

• Name (required)

• Add Leading Digits (optional)

• Echo Cancellation (required)

• Version (required)

• Route Index (required)

National Translation Group





6.3 National Translation Group

To set up translations for domestic routing, you set up one or more national translation groups. Within each national translation group, instructions for each area code or string to be translated and routed is entered as a DIGITTRANSLATION resource.

Up to 11 national translation groups can be created.

NAME National Translation Group

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/ National-Translation

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add TRANSLATIONGROUP Group_Number=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS Group_Number This is a unique number for the national translation group. It becomes part of the translation group’s name. (Example: 2-TRANSLATIONGROUP.) This value is required and must be in the range 1 through 65535.

Name This is an optional user-defined name you can assign to the national translation group.

OTHER COMMANDS

Del <n>-TRANSLATIONGROUP

Mod Name=<value>

EXAMPLES To create a national translation group interactively:

System>cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-TranslationSystem/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation>add translationgroupGroup_Number: 4Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): yName (Default:Not Defined): CarltopiaCommand Successful

Sample batch file content that adds two national translation groups:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation;add TRANSLATIONGROUP Group_Number=1, Name=Standard National;add TRANSLATIONGROUP Group_Number=7, Name=Carltopia;cd;

National Translation Group





EXAMPLES(CONT.)

To change a translation group’s number, you must delete the translation group and add another one with a different number. You can change the translation group’s name by changing to the resource’s context and entering a command similar to this one:

Mod Name=Test

To delete a national translation group numbered 10 interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation>del 10-TRANSLATIONGROUP-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? YCommand Successful

National Digit Translation





6.4 National Digit Translation

To add digit translations for area codes (and other strings) within a national group, you add a DIGTITRANSLATION resource for each string to be translated. The DIGITTRANSLATION resources takes on the name nnn-DIGITTRANSLATION, where nnn is the numeric string (Digit_String) to be translated.

NAME National Digit Translation

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/ National-Translation/n-TRANSLATIONGROUP

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add DIGITTRANSLATION Digit_String=<value>, Route_Action=<value>, Route_Index=<value>, [Description=<value>,] [Ported_Office=<value>]

PARAMETERS Digit_String Area code or other string to be translated. Required value from 1 to 32 digits in length. This value becomes part of the name of the DIGITTRANSLATION resource, such as 303-DIGITTRANSLATION for a Digit_String value of 303.

Route_Action Required indicator to denote whether to use a cause code or a route index to process this string. Use 1 to indicate that the Route_Index value is to be used; 2 to indicate that the Cause_Code is to be used.

Route_Index A value for this parameter is required. It can be a route index or a cause code. It is the index value to be used to route the call when 1 (Route_Index) is specified as the Route_Action, or the cause code to be used to process the call when the Route_Action is 2 to indicate cause code processing. The values may be from 1 through 999999, but cause codes must be valid cause codes.

Description Optional description of the area code, up to 32 characters in length.

Ported_Office Optional value that indicates whether any office code in the string is portable. It can be 1 for yes or 0 for no.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the DIGITTRANSLATION context:

Del <n>-DIGITTRANSLATION

Mod DIGITTRANSLATIOND

To modify a digit translation resource in the resource’s context, then enter:

Mod {name1=<value1>, name2=<value2>, . . .}

National Digit Translation





EXAMPLES Adding a digittranslation resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/ National-Translation/1-TRANSLATIONGROUP>add DIGITTRANSLATION Digit_String=214, Route_Action=1, Route_Index=1, Description=Dallas TX, Ported_Office=0Command Successful

Example of batch file content used to add digittranslation resources:

cd:cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation;cd Wireless-Translation/National-Translation/1-TRANSLATIONGROUP;

add DIGITTRANSLATIONDigit_String=213, Route_Action=1, Route_Index=1, Description=LSAN LA01 CA, Ported_Office=0;

add DIGITTRANSLATIONDigit_String=214, Route_Action=1, Route_Index=1, Description=Dallas TX, Ported_Office=0;

add DIGITTRANSLATIONDigit_String=215, Route_Action=1, Route_Index=1, Description=Ambler PA, Ported_Office=0;

cd;

To delete a digittranslation resource that has a digit_string value of 2999:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation/1-translationgroup>del 2999-digittranslation

-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? YCommand Successful

To change contexts to a digit translation resource that has a digit_string value of 299, then change its route index value to 2:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation/1-translationgroup>cd 299-digittranslation

Command Successful

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/National-Translation/1-translationgroup/299-digittranslation>mod route_index=2

Command Successful

International Country Code Translation





6.5 International Country Code Translation

The international country code functionality allows the user to provision country codes for international and international operator-assisted calls. The user must specify the route index used for the country code. To set up country code translations you must create a resource for each country code. These resources are entered into the International-Translation context.

To provision an international country code, the user must first provision an originator route descriptor.

NAME International Country Code Translation

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/International-Translation

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add COUNTRYCODE Country_Code=<value>, Orig__Route_Descriptor=<value>, [Name=<value>], [Min__Length=<value>], [Max__Length=<value>]

PARAMETERS Country_Code The number that will serve as the country code (and the leading digits of this resource’s name). Entry in this field is required. The country code can be any number two or three-digits in length.

Orig__Route_DescriptorRequired route descriptor identification. This can be any number from 1 through 6.

Name This is an optional name you can assign to the country code, usually the name of the country. (Example: Name=Switzerland and Liechtenstein.) The name can be up to 32 characters in length.

Min__Length This optional value specifies the minimum length expected for the combined country code and phone number. Values can range from 1 to 32 digits. This length includes the length of the country code (CC) plus the length of the National Significant Number (NSN).

Max__Length This optional value specifies the minimum length expected for the combined country code and phone number. Values can range from 1 to 32 digits. The current practice maximum is 15. This length includes the length of the country code (CC) plus the length of the National Significant Number (NSN).

OTHER COMMANDS

Del COUNTRYCODE Country_Code=<value>

Mod {parameter1=<value>, parameter2=<value>, . . . }

International Country Code Translation





EXAMPLES To create a country code resource interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/International-Translation>add countrycodeCountry_Code: 28Orig__Route_Descriptor: 6Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no): YName (Default:Not Defined): CarltopiaMin__Length (Default:7): 13Max__Length (Default:7): 15Command Successful

Sample command used to add a country code in a batch file:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/International-Translation;

add COUNTRYCODE Country_Code=28, Orig__Route_Descriptor=6, Name=Carltopia, Min__Length=13, Max__Length=15;cd;

You can change the attributes of the country code resource by changing to the resource’s context and entering a command like the one below used to change the Name parameter:

Mod Name=Carltopia

To delete a country code numbered 28 interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Wireless-Translation/International-Translation>del 28-COUNTRYCODE-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? YCommand Successful

Originator Route Descriptor





6.6 Originator Route Descriptor

The Originator Route Descriptors must each be added as a digitdescriptor resource.

NAME Originator Route Descriptor

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Descriptor

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add Digitdescriptor Index=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS Index Required number that uniquely identifies the descriptor, in the range 1 through 999999.

Name Required information about the descriptor, such as “Local Operator Assistance” or “Emergency,” up to 32 characters in length.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a DIGITDESCRIPTOR from the Orig-Route-Descriptor context:

Del <n>-DIGITDESCRIPTOR

In the above example, <n> is the Index value of the descriptor. To modify a DIGITDESCRIPTOR, you must first delete it and then add a new one.

EXAMPLES Adding a digit descriptor from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Descriptor>add digitdescriptor index=1, name=InterLata

Sample batch file entry to add a digitdescriptor:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing;cd Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Descriptor;add digitdescriptor index=1, name=InterLata;cd;

Deleting a digitdescriptor from the command line while in the Orig-Route-Descriptor context:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Descriptor>Del 1-digitdescriptor-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ?Y

Command Successful

Originator Route Modifier





6.7 Originator Route Modifier

The Originator Route Modifier context contains multiple ORIGROUTE resources.

NAME Originator Route Modifier

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add ORIGROUTEMODIFIER Profile_Identifier=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS Profile_Identifier Required number used to uniquely identify the group of origination routes.

Name Required alphanumeric name that you want to assign to the originator route modifier.

OTHER COMMANDS

Del Origroutemodifier

To modify an originator route modifier you must delete it first, and then add a new one to replace it. You cannot use the mod command to change one. Also, before deleting an originator route modifier, you must remove all of its resources.

EXAMPLES Adding an originator route modifier.

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier>add Origroutemodifier Profile_Identifier=2, Name=Originating from WMG2

Deleting an originator route modifier:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier>Del 2-Origroutemodifier

Originator Route





6.8 Originator Route

Multiple Originator Routes can be added for each Originator Route Modifier. Each route includes a routing descriptor index value used to identify the route and routing action.The user must specify the originator route parameters, including:

• Originator route modifier

• AMA index

• Route action

• Route index

To provision originator routing parameters, the user must first complete the following tasks:

• Provision a CIC route descriptor

• Provision a cause code

• Provision a route list

• Provision an originator route descriptor

• Provision an originator route modifier.

NAME Originator Route

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier/n-ORIGROUTEMODIFIER

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add ORIGROUTE Origroute_descriptor, Digit_type, Ama_index, Route_Action, Route_Index

PARAMETERS Origroute_descriptorRequired originator route descriptor for this resource. Valid values are the indexes for the descriptors added to the Orig Route Descriptor table as “digitdescriptor” resources. (These values are used as indexes into this table in the NOA, Prefix Translation, National Translation and International Country Code tables.)

Digit_Type You must specify an input string type, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 DT_SUBSCRIBER5 DT_INTRALATA_NATIONAL6 DT_INTERLATA_NATIONAL17 DT_EMERGENCY_CODE26 DT_DO_NOT_OVERRIDE

Ama_Index Specifies a required Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) translation index value (range 1 - 255). This is used in Bellcore AMA Format (BAF) record generation.

Originator Route





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Route_Action This is a required parameter used to specify the action to be taken when processing this call, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 INVALID_TYPE2 ROUTE_BY_CARRIER4 ROUTE_BY_CPC6 ROUTE_BY_TOD7 ROUTE_DIRECT8 TREATMENT3 ROUTE_BY_IMSI5 ROUTE_BY_LAC12 ROUTE_BY_OSSS13 ROUTE_BY_OCSI

Route_Index Required route index value.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-origroute

Mod origroute [idname=id], {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

From inside the resource context:

Mod {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

EXAMPLES Adding a new origroute from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-

Route-Modifier/2-ORIGROUTEMODIFIER>Add origroute origroute_descriptor=1,

digit_type=1, ama_index=1, route_action=0, route_index=0

An entry in a batch file used to add a new origroute:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/;cd Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier/2-ORIGROUTEMODIFIER;Add origrouteorigroute_descriptor=1, digit_type=1, ama_index=1, route_action=0, route_index=0;cd;

Modifying a route index to equal 1 using the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier/2-ORIGROUTEMODIFIER/1-ORIGROUTE>mod route_index=1

Deleting an originator route:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/Orig-Routing/Orig-Route-Modifier/2-ORIGROUTEMODIFIER>Del 2-ORIGROUTE

CIC Route Descriptor





6.9 CIC Route Descriptor

The CIC route descriptors must each be added as a cicdescriptor resource.

NAME CIC Route Descriptor

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Descriptor

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add CICDESCRIPTOR Index=<value>, Name=<value>


Name Required information about the descriptor, up to 32 characters in length.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a CICDESCRIPTOR from the CIC-Route-Descriptor context:

Del <n>-CICDESCRIPTOR

In the above example <n> is the Index value for the descriptor.

To change a CICDESCRIPTOR, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old CICDESCRIPTOR and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

EXAMPLES Adding a CICDESCRIPTOR from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Descriptor>add CICDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=CIC1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a CICDESCRIPTOR resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Descriptor;add CICDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=CIC1;cd;

Deleting a CICDESCRIPTOR:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Descriptor>del 1-CICDESCRIPTOR-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

CIC Route Selector





6.10 CIC Route Selector

The CIC route selectors must each be added as a CARRIERID resource.

NAME CIC Route Selector

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Selector

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add CARRIERID Index=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS Index Required number that uniquely identifies the selector, in the range 1 through 999999.

Name Required information about the selector, up to 32 characters in length.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a CARRIERID from the CIC-Route-Selector context:

Del <n>-CARRIERID

In the above example <n> is the Index value for the selector.

To change a CARRIERID, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old CARRIERID and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

EXAMPLES Adding a CARRIERID from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Selector>add CARRIERID index=1, name=CIC1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a CARRIERID resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Selector;add CARRIERID index=1, name=CIC1;cd;

Deleting a CARRIERID:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Selector>del 1-CARRIERID-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

CIC Route





6.11 CIC Route

To provision CIC carrier routing parameters, the user must first complete the following tasks:



• Provision a time of day route descriptor

• Provision a CIC route descriptor

• Provision a CIC route selector

NAME CIC Routing

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Selector/<n>-Carrierid

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add CICROUTING CIC_Route_Descriptor=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS CIC_Route_DescriptorRequired CIC route descriptor for this resource. Valid values are CIC route descriptors that are assigned in Originator Routing.

Route_Action Required to indicate how to route the call, as follows:

Value Meaning

3 Route by IMSI4 Route by CPC5 Route by LAC6 Route by ToD7 Route Immediately8 Intercept12 Route by OSSS13 Route by OCSI

Route_Index Required to identify a resource within the routing table that indicates where to route the call.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the CICROUTING context:

Del <n>-CICROUTING

Mod CICROUTING CIC_Route_Descriptor=<value>, [Route_Action=<value>,] [Route_Index=<value>]

From inside the CICROUTING context:

Mod [Route_Action=<value>,] [Route_Index=<value>]

CIC Route





EXAMPLES Adding a CICROUTING from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC Route-Selector/1-CARRIERID>add CICROUTING CIC_Route_Descriptor=1, Route_Action=6, Route_Index=1

Command Successful

Sample batch file entry to add a CICROUTING resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC Route-Selector/1-CARRIERID;add CICROUTING CIC_Route_Descriptor=1, Route_Action=6, Route_Index=1;cd;

Deleting a CICROUTING resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Selector/1-CARRIERID>del 1-CICROUTING-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Modifying a CICROUTING resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CIC-Routing/CIC-Route-Selector/1-CARRIERID/1-CICROUTING>mod route_action=3

IMSI Route Descriptor





6.12 IMSI Route Descriptor

The IMSI route descriptors must each be added as an imsidescriptor resource.

NAME IMSI Route Descriptor

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Descriptor

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add IMSIDESCRIPTOR Index=<value>, Name=<value>



OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a IMSIDESCRIPTOR from the IMSI-Route-Descriptor context:

Del <n>-IMSIDESCRIPTOR


To change a IMSIDESCRIPTOR, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old IMSIDESCRIPTOR and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

EXAMPLES Adding an IMSIDESCRIPTOR from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Descriptor>add IMSIDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=IMSI1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add an IMSIDESCRIPTOR resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Descriptor;add IMSIDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=IMSI1;cd;

Deleting an IMSIDESCRIPTOR:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Descriptor>del 1-IMSIDESCRIPTOR-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

IMSI Route Modifier





6.13 IMSI Route Modifier

The IMSI route modifiers must each be added as an imsimodifier resource.

NAME IMSI Route Modifier

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add IMSIMODIFIER IMSI=<value>, IMSI_Modifier=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS IMSI Specifies IMSI digits.

IMSI_Modifier Specifies the IMSI modifier.

Name Description of this specific IMSI route modifier.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a IMSIMODIFIER from the IMSI-Route-Modifier context:

Del <n>-IMSIMODIFIER

Mod IMSIMODIFIER IMSI=<value>, [Name=<value>]

From inside the CICROUTING context:

Mod [Name=<value>]

EXAMPLES Adding a IMSIMODIFIER from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier>add IMSIMODIFIER IMSI=2, IMSI_Modifier=255, Name=IMSI2

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a IMSIMODIFIER resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier;add IMSIMODIFIER IMSI=2, IMSI_Modifier=255, Name=IMSI2;cd;

Deleting an IMSIMODIFIER:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier>del 1-IMSIMODIFIER-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

IMSI Route





6.14 IMSI Route

To provision IMSI routing parameters, the user must first complete the following tasks:

• Provision an originator route modifier




• Provision an IMSI route descriptor

• Provision an IMSI route modifier

NAME IMSI Routing

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier/<n>-IMSIMODIFIER

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add IMSIROUTE IMSI_Route_Descriptor=<value>, IMSI_Route_Modifier=<value>, Route_Action=<value>, Route_Index=<value>

PARAMETERS IMSI_Route_DescriptorRequired IMSI route descriptor for this resource. Valid values are IMSI route descriptors that are assigned in Originator Routing.

IMSI_Route_ModifierRequired IMSI route modifier from the IMSI modifier table.


Value Meaning

4 Route by CPC5 Route by LAC6 Route by ToD7 Route Immediately8 Intercept12 Route by OSSS13 Route by OCSI


IMSI Route





OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the IMSIROUTE context:

Del <n>-IMSIROUTE

Mod IMSIROUTE IMSI_Route_Descriptor=<value>, [Route_Action=<value>,] [Route_Index=<value>]

From inside the IMSIROUTE context:


EXAMPLES Adding a IMSIROUTE from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier/1-IMSIMODIFIER>add IMSIROUTE IMSI_Route_Descriptor=2, IMSI_Route_Modifier=255, Route_Action=6, Route_Index=2

Command Successful

Sample batch file entry to add a IMSIROUTE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier/1-IMSIMODIFIER;add IMSIROUTE IMSI_Route_Descriptor=2, IMSI_Route_Modifier=255, Route_Action=6, Route_Index=2;cd;

Deleting a IMSIROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier/1-IMSIMODIFIER>del 1-IMSIROUTE-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Modifying a IMSIROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/IMSI-Routing/IMSI-Route-Modifier/1-IMSIMODIFIER>mod IMSIROUTE IMSI_Route_Descriptor=2, Route_Action=7

CPC Route Descriptor





6.15 CPC Route Descriptor

The CPC route descriptors must each be added as a CPCDESCRIPTOR resource.

NAME CPC Route Descriptor

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Descriptor

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add CPCDESCRIPTOR Index=<value>, Name=<value>



OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a CPCDESCRIPTOR from the CPC-Route-Descriptor context:

Del <n>-CPCDESCRIPTOR


To change a CPCDESCRIPTOR, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old CPCDESCRIPTOR and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

EXAMPLES Adding a CPCDESCRIPTOR from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Descriptor>add CPCDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=CPC1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a CPCDESCRIPTOR resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Descriptor;add CPCDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=CPC1;cd;

Deleting an CPCDESCRIPTOR:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Descriptor>del 1-CPCDESCRIPTOR-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

CPC Route Modifier





6.16 CPC Route Modifier

The CPC route modifiers must each be added as a CPCMODIFIER resource.

NAME CPC Route Modifier

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add CPCMODIFIER Profile_Identifier=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS Profile_Identifier Specifies a number that uniquely identifies the originator routing profile. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Unknown1 French Operator2 English Operator3 German Operator4 Russian Operator5 Spanish Operator9 National Operator10 Ordinary Calling Subscriber12 Calling Subscriber with Priority13 Data Call14 Test Call15 Pay Phone16 Mobile Terminal in Home PLMN17 Mobile Terminal Visited PLMN224 Emergency Call225 High Priority Emergency Call226 NS EP255 All other CPC

Name Name of the originator routing profile.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a CPCMODIFIER from the CPC-Route-Modifier context:

Del <n>-CPCMODIFIER

In the above example <n> is the Index value for the modifier.

To change a CPCMODIFIER, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old CPCMODIFIER and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

CPC Route Modifier





EXAMPLES Adding a CPCMODIFIER from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier>add CPCMODIFIER Profile_Identifier=2, Name=CPC1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a CPCMODIFIER resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier;add CPCMODIFIER Profile_Identifier=2, Name=CPC1;cd;

Deleting an CPCMODIFIER:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier>del 1-CPCMODIFIER-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

CPC Route





6.17 CPC Route

To provision IMSI routing parameters, the user must first complete the following tasks:





• Provision an CPC route descriptor

• Provision an CPC route modifier

NAME CPC Routing

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier/<n>-CPCMODIFIER

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add CPCROUTE CPCRoute_Descriptor=<value>, Route_Action=<value>, Route_Index=<value>

PARAMETERS CPCRoute_DescriptorRequired CPC route descriptor for this resource. Valid values are CPC route descriptors that are assigned in Orig Routing.


Value Meaning

5 Route by LAC6 Route by ToD7 Route Immediately8 Intercept12 Route by OSSS13 Route by OCSI


OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the CPCROUTE context:

Del <n>-CPCROUTE

Mod CPCROUTE CPCRoute_Descriptor=<value>, [Route_Action=<value>,] [Route_Index=<value>]

From inside the CPCROUTE context:


CPC Route





EXAMPLES Adding a CPCROUTE from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier/1-CPCMODIFIER>add CPCROUTE CPCRoute_Descriptor=2, Route_Action=7, Route_Index=2

Command Successful

Sample batch file entry to add a CPCROUTE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier/1-CPCMODIFIER;add CPCROUTE CPCRoute_Descriptor=2, Route_Action=7, Route_Index=2;cd;

Deleting a CPCROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier/1-CPCMODIFIER>del 1-CPCROUTE-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Modifying a CPCROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/CPC-Routing/CPC-Route-Modifier/1-CPCMODIFIER>mod CPCROUTE CPCRoute_Descriptor=2, Route_Action=8, Route_Index=3

LAC Route Descriptor





6.18 LAC Route Descriptor

The LAC route descriptors must each be added as a lacdescriptor resource.

NAME LAC Route Descriptor

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Descriptor

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add LACDESCRIPTOR Index=<value>, Name=<value>



OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a LACDESCRIPTOR from the LAC-Route-Descriptor context:

Del <n>-LACDESCRIPTOR


To change a LACDESCRIPTOR, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old LACDESCRIPTOR and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

EXAMPLES Adding a LACDESCRIPTOR from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Descriptor>add LACDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=LAC1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a LACDESCRIPTOR resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Descriptor;add LACDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=LAC1;cd;

Deleting an LACDESCRIPTOR:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Descriptor>del 1-LACDESCRIPTOR-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

LAC Route Modifier





6.19 LAC Route Modifier

The Location Area Code (LAC) route modifiers must each be added as a lacmodifier resource.

NAME LAC Route Modifier

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add LACMODIFIER Profile_Identifier=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS LAC_Modifier Define a LAC Route Modifier index to access the LAC Routing table.

Name Description of this specific Cell Id range within the specified LAC.

Mcc_Mnc_Id Indentifies the country code (MCC) and network code (/MNC) for the LAC.

LAC_Unknown If this field is set to 1, this is for routing by modifier when the LAC anc Cell Begin/End values are set to zeros, meaning the LAC is not known. Set this to 0 if the modifier will be used for routing when theLAC is known and values are to be matched.

LAC Local Area Code.

Cell_ID_Begin Specifies the smallest of Cell Id range identifying the cells or a subset of cells in this LAC.

Cell_ID_End Specifies the largest of Cell Id range identifying the cells or a subset of cells in this LAC.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a LACMODIFIER from the LAC-Route-Modifier context:

Del <n>-<n>-<n>-<n>-<n>-LACMODIFIER

Mod LACMODIFIER LAC_Modifier=<value>, Mcc_Mnc_Id=<value>, LAC=<value>, Cell_ID_Begin=<value>, Cell_ID_End=<value>, [Name=<value>]

From inside the LACMODIFIER context:

Mod [Name=<value>]

Modifying a LACMODIFIER resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier>mod LACMODIFIER Mcc_Mnc_Id=1, LAC=3, Cell_ID_Begin=1, Cell_ID_End=10, LAC_Modifier=1, Name=test

LAC Route Modifier





EXAMPLES Adding a LACMODIFIER from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier>add LACMODIFIER LAC_Modifier=1, Name=lac1, Mcc_Mnc_Id=1, LAC=3, Cell_ID_Begin=1, Cell_ID_End=10

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a LACMODIFIER resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier;add LACMODIFIER LAC_Modifier=1, Name=lac1, Mcc_Mnc_Id=1, LAC=3, Cell_ID_Begin=1, Cell_ID_End=10;cd;

Deleting an LACMODIFIER:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier>del 1-3-1-10-1-LACMODIFIER-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

LAC Route





6.20 LAC Route

To provision LAC routing parameters, the user must first complete the following tasks:





• Provision an LAC route descriptor

• Provision an LAC route modifier

NAME LAC Routing

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier/<n>-<n>-<n>-<n>-<n>-LACMODIFIER

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add LACROUTE LAC_Route_Descriptor=<value>, Route_Action=<value>, Route_Index=<value>

PARAMETERS LAC_Route_DescriptorRequired LAC route descriptor for this resource. Valid values are LAC route descriptors that are assigned in Originator Routing.


Value Meaning

6 Route by ToD7 Route Immediately8 Intercept12 Route by OSSS13 Route by OCSI


OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the LACROUTE context:

Del <n>-LACROUTE

Mod CPCROUTE LAC_Route_Descriptor=<value>, [Route_Action=<value>,] [Route_Index=<value>]

From inside the CPCROUTE context:


LAC Route





EXAMPLES Adding a LACROUTE from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier/1-3-1-10-1-LACMODIFIER>add LACROUTE LAC_Route_Descriptor=1, Route_Action=7, Route_Index=1

Command Successful

Sample batch file entry to add a LACROUTE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier/1-3-1-10-1-LACMODIFIER;add LACROUTE LAC_Route_Descriptor=1, Route_Action=7, Route_Index=1;cd;

Deleting a LACROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier/1-3-1-10-1-LACMODIFIER>del 1-LACROUTE-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Modifying a LACROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/LAC-Routing/LAC-Route-Modifier/1-3-1-10-1-LACMODIFIER>mod LACROUTE LAC_Route_Descriptor=1, Route_Action=7, Route_Index=3

ToD Route Descriptor





6.21 ToD Route Descriptor

The ToD route descriptors must each be added as a TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR resource.

NAME ToD Route Descriptor

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Descriptor

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR Index=<value>, Name=<value>



OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR from the ToD-Route-Descriptor context:

Del <n>-TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR


To change a TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

EXAMPLES Adding a TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Descriptor>add TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=TOD1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Descriptor;add TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR index=1, name=TOD1;cd;

ToD Route Descriptor





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

Deleting an TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Descriptor>del 1-TIMEOFDAYROUTEDESCRIPTOR-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

ToD Route Selector





6.22 ToD Route Selector

The ToD route selectors must each be added as a TIMERCLASS resource.

NAME ToD Route Selector

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add TIMERCLASS Index=<value>, Classification=<value>

PARAMETERS Index Required number that uniquely identifies the selector, in the range 1 through 999999.

Classification Specifies a string that uniquely identifies a timer classification.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a TIMERCLASS from the ToD-Route-Selector context:

Del <n>-TIMERCLASS

In the above example <n> is the Index value for the selector.

To change a TIMERCLASS, you cannot use the mod command. Instead, delete the old TIMERCLASS and add a new one that contains the changes you want to make.

EXAMPLES Adding a TIMERCLASS from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector>add Classification Index=1, Classification=TOD1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a TIMERCLASS resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector;add CARRIERID Index=1, Classification=TOD1;cd;

Deleting a TIMERCLASS:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/Tod-Route-Selector>del 1-TIMERCLASS-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

ToD Route





6.23 ToD Route

To provision ToD routing parameters, the user must first complete the following tasks:





• Provision a ToD route descriptor

• Provision a ToD route selector

NAME ToD Routing

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector/<n>-TIMERCLASS

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add TIMEOFDAYROUTE ToD_Route_Descriptor=<value>, ToD_Route_Selector=<value>, Route_List=<value>

PARAMETERS ToD_Route_DescriptorRequired ToD route descriptor for this resource. Valid values are ToD route descriptors.

ToD_Route_SelectorRequired ToD route selector for this resource. Valid values are ToD route selectors.

Route_List Required to identify a resource within the routing table that indicates where to route the call.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the TIMEOFDAYROUTE context:

Del <n>-TIMEOFDAYROUTE

Mod TIMEOFDAYROUTE ToD_Route_Descriptor=<value>, [ToD_Route_Selector=<value>,] [Route_List=<value>]

From inside the TIMEOFDAYROUTE context:

Mod [ToD_Route_Selector=<value>,] [Route_List=<value>]

ToD Route





EXAMPLES Adding a TIMEOFDAYROUTE from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector/1-TIMERCLASS>add TIMEOFDAYROUTE ToD_Route_Descriptor=2, ToD_Route_Selector=2, Route_List=1

Command Successful

Sample batch file entry to add a TIMEOFDAYROUTE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector/1-TIMERCLASS;add TIMEOFDAYROUTE ToD_Route_Descriptor=2, ToD_Route_Selector=2, Route_List=1;cd;

Deleting a TIMEOFDAYROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector/1-TIMERCLASS>del 1-TIMEOFDAYROUTE-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Modifying a TIMEOFDAYROUTE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Routing/ToD-Routing/ToD-Route-Selector/1-TIMERCLASS>mod TIMEOFDAYROUTE ToD_Route_Descriptor=2, Route_List=3

Route List





6.24 Route List

The system uses the route list functionality to find where a call is terminated. The user can provision up to eight route types for each route list. The route types supported:

• Trunk group

• Trunk group bundle

• Disconnect

• Queue

To provision a route list, the user must first complete the following tasks:

• Provision trunk groups

• Provision cause codes

• Provision outpulse maps

• Provision trunk group bundles

You can add multiple MSCROUTELIST resources, each identified by a Route_List_Id which becomes part of the resource’s name. For example, 3-MSCROUTELIST has a 3 as its Route_List_Id index value.

NAME Route List

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Route-List

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add MSCROUTELIST Route_List_Id=<value>, {Type_1=<value>, Type_2=<value> . . . }, CliOutpulse=<value>, [Outpulse_1=<value>, Outpulse_2=<value>, . . . ] [Value_1=<value>, Value_2=<value>, . . . ], [Name=<value>,] [Look_Ahead={1|0}]

PARAMETERS Route_List_Id Required number that uniquely identifies this instance of a resource within the route list.

{Type_1=<value>, Type_2=<value> . . . }These values are required to express the purpose of each of up to eight routes. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 Empty1 Trunk Group2 Bundle3 Disconnect4 Queue

Route List





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

[Outpulse_1=<value>, Outpulse_2=<value>, . . . ]These optional parameters correspond to each type defined by the Type_n parameters. (For example, the Outpulse_3 and Value_3 parameters corresponds to the Type_3 parameter.) The Outpulse gives the outpulse map index for routing the type.

[Value_1=<value>, Value_2=<value>, . . . ]The Value parameters identify the SysGrpNum (trunk group), trunk bundle or cause, or it is not used, depending upon its corresponding Type_n value. For example, if Type_1 is a 1 for “Trunk Group,” then Value_1 identifies the particular trunk group used in the routing (see table).

Value Meaning

0 EmptyNot used1 Trunk GroupSysGrpNum2 BundleTrunk group bundle number3 DisconnectCause code4 Queue Not used

Name Optional user-defined name to describe the route list.

Look_Ahead Optional indicator to denote whether look-ahead processing is in effect for this trunk. 1 means Yes; 0 means No. This feature is used for trunk routing. When a call is placed to a remote node, the system will “Look Ahead” to the destination system to determine if the called station is available.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the context:

Del <n>-MSCROUTELIST

Mod MSCROUTELIST Route_List_Id=<value>, { parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

From within the mscroutelist context:

Mod { parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

Route List





EXAMPLES Adding an mscroutelist entry from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Route-List>add MSCROUTELIST Route_List_Id=6, Type_1=1, Type_2=1, Type_3=1, Type_4=1, Type_5=1, Type_6=1, Type_7=1, CliOutpulse=2, Outpulse_1=3, Value_1=0, Outpulse_2=0, Value_2=4, Outpulse_3=0, Value_3=4 Outpulse_4=0, Value_4=4 Outpulse_5=0, Value_5=4 Outpulse_6=0, Value_6=4, Outpulse_7=7, Value_7=4, Outpulse_8=1, Value_8=4, Name=FRC78, Look_Ahead=0

Command Successful

Example of adding a mscroutelist resource in a batch file:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Route-List;add MSCROUTELIST Route_List_Id=6,

Name=Operator,Look_Ahead=0,CliOutpulse=0,Type_1=0, Outpulse_1=0, Value_1=1,

Type_2=0, Outpulse_2=0, Value_2=1,Type_3=0, Outpulse_3=0, Value_3=1,Type_4=0, Outpulse_4=0, Value_4=1,Type_5=0, Outpulse_5=0, Value_5=1,Type_6=0, Outpulse_6=0, Value_6=1,Type_7=0, Outpulse_7=0, Value_7=1,Type_8=0, Outpulse_8=0, Value_8=1;

cd;

To delete an mscroutelist with six as its index (Route_List_id) from the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Route-List>del 6-mscroutelist


Changes the Outpulse_5 value to 1 in the 6-MSCROUTELIST resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Route-List/6-MSCROUTELIST>mod Outpulse_5=1

Base Station System (BSS) Trunk Groups





6.25 Base Station System (BSS) Trunk Groups

If your system uses BSS trunk groups, they must be defined within the System/Groups/BSS context under Groups. To set up BSS trunk groups, you must create a BSSGROUP resource for each trunk group.

NAME BSS Trunk Groups

CONTEXT System/Groups/BSS/Groups

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add BSSGROUP {name1=value1, name2=value2, . . .}






PARAMETERS User_Grp_Number Required identification number used to uniquely identify the BSS trunk group, in the range 1 through 9999999.

Translation_GroupSpecifies the national translation group to use to translate calls that originate on this trunk group. Required value in the range 1 through 32,767. Default is 1. It must match an existing translation group number.

Prefix_Translator Specifies the first prefix translator to use for calls originating on this translation groups. If this is required for the translation group specified, enter the index to the appropriate prefix translator. Default is 1.

Network_Group Specifies the Network Group to use for calls on this trunk group. Required value in the range 1 through 32767. Default is 1.

Network_ID Required value that indicates the standard used for traffic on this trunk, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 ANSI922 ITU_INTL3 ITU_NAL 4 C5 ITU_RES6 ANSI96

Point_Code Specifies the destination point code for this trunk group. This must been entered in the format nnn-nnn-nnn, where nnn can range from 1 to 255, but must match existing point codes.

Circuit_Pool_ID This is the Pool_ID of a group of mobile station roaming numbers (MSRN) defined for this softswitch. It represents a range of MSRN’s used by this base station subsytem. (GSM circuit pool identifiers are described in the 3GPP 48.008 R5 specification). Valid values are 1-50, except 11, 14, 16 and 17. 42-48 is for CTM. The default is 20. (See the “MSRN HON Distribution” section of this manual where the MSRN ranges are established.)

Screening_Class Specifies the screening class for a call terminating from the trunk group. Required value in the range 1 through 1023.






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Orig_Route_ModifierSpecifies the originator routing profile used for calls originated by trunks in this group. (These values are under the Routing-and-Translation/Routing tables, under Orig-Routing/Orig-Routing-Modifier.) The softswitch uses this value to select the origination routing table that will be used to route calls on this trunk group. Required.

Prim_Pool_Id Specifies primary roaming number pool ID. Required.

Sec_Pool_Id Specifies a secondary roaming number pool ID. Required.

Mobile_Type Optional indicator to indicate the type of BSS Signaling technology being used. Must be 1 for GSM or 2 for CDMA.

Name Optional unique name to identify the trunk group, up to 64 characters in length.

NOA_Routing Specifies whether NOA routing is enabled for this trunk. Optional. If NOA routing is enabled, enter 1; otherwise, 0.

Critical Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before a critical alarm is sent. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent.

Minor_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a minor alarm.Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than major percent.

Major_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a major alarm. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than critical percent.

Killer Trunk Specifies whether to enable or disable killer trunk supervision for this group. Enter 1 to enable monitoring; 0 to disable it.

B_Channel_Number Optional value that specifies the first B channel in the PRI. This value determines if channel numbering starts from 0 or 1. If it starts from 0, enter 0; otherwise, enter 1.

Direction Specifies the trunk group direction, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Two way communications permitted.1 Incoming communications only.2 Outgoing communications only.






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Selection_Order Specifies the order to be used when selecting trunks from the group. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 Least idle.1 Longest idle.2 Ascending.3 Descending.

Channel_Rate_Type Specifies which channel rate types are available. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 SDCCH_BM_LM1 SDCCH2 SDCCH_BM3 SDCCH_LM8 BM 9 LM 10 FULL_PREF_CHNG 11 HALF_PREF_CHNG15 FULL_HALF_CHNG26 FULL_PREF_NO_CHNG27 HALF_PREF_NO_CHNG31 FULL_HALF_NO_CHNG32 FULL_MSLOT_CHNG48 FULL_MSLOT_NO_CHNG255 CRT_NONE

Jurisdiction_Info Specifies the Jurisdiction Information Parameter. Optional value from 1 through 6.

Guard_Timer Specifies the Guard Timer value in units of .25 seconds to represent 0 to 2 seconds. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 NO_GLARE1 MSEC_2502 MSEC_5003 MSEC_7504 MSEC_10005 MSEC_12506 MSEC_1500-7 MSEC_17508 MSEC_2000






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

ALC_Media_StreamMedia Stream Automatic Level Control type. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 alc_disable1 alc_type02 alc_type13 alc_type24 alc_type3

jitBufSize Bearer type. Enter 0 for TDM or 1 for VOIP.

ANR_Media_StreamThe media stream’s Automatic Noise Control (ANR) type, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 ANC disabled1 ANC type 0 enabled2 ANC type 1 enabled

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-BSSGROUP

Mod BSSGROUP User_Grp_Number=<value>, { parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

From within the resource context







EXAMPLES Adding BSS group interactively from the command prompt:

System/Groups/BSS/Groups>add bssgroup

User_Grp_Number: 11Translation_Group: 4Translation_Group=>Prefix_Translator:2Network_Group:1Network_ID:2Network_ID=>Point_Code:7-44-7Circuit_Pool_ID:12Screening_Class:5Orig_Route_Modifier:1Prim_Pool_Id:1Sec_Pool_Id:2

Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : Y

Mobile_Type (Default:1) :1Name (Default:Not Defined) :Test BSS trunk group.NOA_Routing (Default:1) :1Critical_Per (Default:15) :30Minor_Per (Default:5) :10Major_Per (Default:10) :20Killer_Trunk_Monitor (Default:0) :0B_Channel_Number (Default:1) :5Direction (Default:2) :2Selection_Order (Default:1) :1Channel_Rate_Type (Default:8) :8Jurisdiction_Info (Default:Not Defined) :whatGuard_Timer (Default:3) :3






EXAMPLE (CONT.)

ALC_Media_Stream (Default:0) :3jitBufSize (Default:0) :0ANR_Media_Stream (Default:0) :2

Command Successful

Example of entries in a batch file for adding a BSS group:

cd;cd Groups/BSS/Groups;

add BSSGROUP User_Grp_Number=11,Translation_Group=4,Prefix_Translator=2,Network_Group=1,Network_ID=2,Point_Code=7-44-7,Circuit_Pool_ID=12,Screening_Class=5,Orig_Route_Modifier=1,Prim_Pool_Id=1,Sec_Pool_Id=2,Mobile_Type=1,Name=Test BSS group data,NOA_Routing=1,Critical_Per=30,Minor_Per=10,Major_Per=20;

cd;

Deleting a BSS group that has a User_Grp_Number of “4” from the System/Groups/BSS/Groups context:

System/Groups/BSS/Groups>Del 4-BSSGROUP

Modifying the Killer_Trunk_Monitor parameter of BSS group number “4” when in the System/Groups/BSS/Groups context:

System/Groups/BSS/Groups>Mod BSSGROUP User_Grp_Number=4, Killer_Trunk_Monitor=1Command Successful

Modifying the Point_Code parameter for BSS group number “4” from within the resource context:

System/Groups/BSS/Groups/4-BSSGROUP>mod point_code=4-90-6Command Successful

ISUP Trunk Group





6.26 ISUP Trunk Group

ISUP trunk groups must be defined within the System/Groups/ISUP context under Groups. To set up ISUP trunk groups, you must create an ISUPGROUP resource for each trunk group. To provision an ISUP trunk group, the user must first complete the following tasks:

• Configure a WMG Node.

• Provision a Subscriber Group.

• Provision a Translation Group.

• Provision a Network Group.

• Provision a Prefix Translator.

• Provision an Originating Screening Class.

• Provision an Orig Route Modifier.

• Provision the destination point codes (DPC).

• Provision the origination point codes (OPC).

NAME ISUP Trunk Group

CONTEXT System/Groups/ISUP/Groups

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add SS7GROUP {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

PARAMETERS User_Grp_NumberThe system group number for this trunk. Required value in the range 1 to 9999999.

Group_Type The type of trunk group. Must be 0 for ISUP.



Network_Group Specifies the network group to use for calls that originate on this trunk group. Required value in the range 1 through 32,767. Default is 1.

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Direction The direction of message traffic allowed within the trunk group. Required value, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Two-way communications.1 Incoming only. 2 Outgoing only.

Out_IAM_MSG_Access_TransportIf the Direction specification was 0 or 2 (the two direction choices that allow outgoing messages), you must specify whether IAM messages will be used in the outbound direction. Enter 1 to indicate they will be sent or 0 to indicate that calls are not initiated in the outbound direction.

Orig_Screening_ClassThe screening class for a call terminating from the trunk group. Required value that must be within the range 1 through 1024.

Orig_Route_ModifierSpecifies the origination routing table to use to route calls incoming on this trunk group. The value you use must match a modifier configured for the system. (The input for these tables are in the Routing-and-Translation/Routing section, under Orig-Routing/Orig-Routing-Modifier.) Required.

Routing_Indicator Denotes how the trunk is connected to the destination (for BAF AMA records). Required. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 DIRECT1 TANDEM2 CAP_DIRECT_EO3 CAP_DIRECT_AP4 TANDEM_TSP_CAP5 TANDEM_LEC_EO6 MOBILE_POSITION_CENTER7 TANDEM_TO_CAMA8 TO_SELECTIVE_ROUTE9 TO_SELECTIVE_ROUTE_IWG.

Sub_Type Specifies whether the Telephone User Part (TUP) portion of the ISUP protocol is used exclusively for this trunk. You must enter 0 to indicate a NON_SPECIFIC protocol subtype is used; 1 to indicate TUP is used.

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Release_Control_ModeUsed for sub_type specifications to indicate the release control mode when TUP is used, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 CgPartyCtrlRl2 CgCdPartyCtrlRls3 CdPartyCtrlRls

Outpulsing_CIC Specifies the outpulsing Carrier Identification Code. Required.

Mate_Trunk_Grp Specifies the Emergency Call MPC Loop-back trunk group.

Bearer_Type Required indicator to denote the type of traffic going over the trunk group. If the trunk group supports clear channel 64K transfer capability to the destination node then set it to UDI_RDI. If the trunk group does not support clear channel 64K transfer capability, due to the type of trunk used (e.g., MF) or the transmission equipment in the path, do not set it to UDI_RDI. Instead, consider setting it to 3.1KHz or voice.

If the trunk group supports MF channels, it can be set to either 3.1 KHz or voice. UDI_RDI trunk groups can be used to carry digital data, or Modem/FAX data or voice. The 3.1KHz trunk groups can be used to carry Modem/FAX data or voice. Trunk groups marked Voice can not be used to carry digital data. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 DATA_3_1KHZ1 UDI_RDI2 Voice

ANR_Media_StreamThe media stream’s Automatic Noise Control (ANR) type. This specification is required only for bearer types 0 (DATA_3_1KHZ) and 2 (VOICE). Values are:

Value Meaning

0 ANC disabled1 ANC type 0 enabled2 ANC type 1 enabled

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

ALC_Media_StreamThis is the media stream’s Automatic Level Control (ALC) type. This specification is required only for bearer types 0 (DATA_3_1KHZ) and 2 (VOICE). Values are:

Value Meaning

0 alc_disable1 alc_type02 alc_type13 alc_type24 alc_type3

Test_Type Required code to indicate the type of trunk test to be performed on this group, according to these values:

Value Meaning

0 TRKTEST_NON1 TRKTEST_COT2 TRKTEST_MW3 TRKTEST_MW_TDM4 TRKTEST_TONEGEN5 TRKTEST_SIGNALING6 TRKTEST_OUTPULSIN7 TRKTEST_ROUTINE8 TRKTEST_T1009 TRKTEST_T10210 TRKTEST_T10511 TRKTEST_T10812 TRKTEST_MW_INTERNODE

Carrier_ID Identification of the carrier for this trunk group.

CNA_Trunk Required to indicate whether the trunk is configured as a Connecting Network Access Trunk (CNAT). Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No.

Record_BN_OptionEnter 0 to turn off the billing record number option for this trunk; 1 to turn it on. Required.

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Network_ID The standard used for traffic on this trunk group, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 ANSI922 ITU_INTL3 ITU_NAL4 C75 ITU_RES6 ANSI96

DPC This is the destination point code (DPC) for the trunk group, and serves as an index into the signaling gateway table. This must be entered in the format nnn-nnn-nnn, where nnn can range from 1 to 255, but must match existing point codes in the signaling gateway table.

OPC This is the origination point code (OPC) for the trunk group, and serves as an index into the signaling gateway table. This must be entered in the format nnn-nnn-nnn, where nnn can range from 1 to 255, but must match existing point codes in the signaling gateway table.

Incoming_Half Required to indicate whether echo cancellation will be used on inbound calls on this trunk group. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No.

Network_Data Required to indicate whether to include Network Data parameters in backward messages for incoming trunk. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Carrier_Info Set to 1 to indicate that the carrier ID code will be included in the IAM or 0 to indicate it is not carried.

Name Optional name you can assign to the trunk group.

Glare Control Optional value that indicates what to do in the case of a glare situation, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Release control1 Take control2 Use CIC numbering

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Guard_Timer The Guard Timer value in units of .25 seconds to represent 0 to 2 seconds. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 NO_GLARE1 MSEC_2502 MSEC_5003 MSEC_7504 MSEC_10005 MSEC_12506 MSEC_15007 MSEC_17508 MSEC_2000

Signaling_Forward_Path Required to indicate whether the trunk group cuts a forward path before the connect message. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Dir_Term_Per_ACL1Specifies the ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 1.Optional value from 1 to 100.

Dir_Term_Per_ACL2Specifies the ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 2. Optional value from 1 to 100.

Alt_Term_Per_ACL1Specifies the alternate ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 1. Optional value from 1 to 100.

Alt_Term_Per_ACL2 Specifies the alternate ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 2. Optional value from 1 to 100.

Control_Option Required to indicate the Automatic Congestion Control (ACC) option for this trunk group, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 ACC invalid1 ACC off2 ACC on skip3 ACC on cancel

Critical Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before a critical alarm is sent. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent.

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Minor_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a minor alarm. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than major percent.

NOA_Routing Specifies whether Nature of Address (NOA) routing is implemented for this trunk group. Enter 1 to indicate NOA routing is enabled for this trunk group; 0 to indicate NOA routing is not enabled for this trunk group. Defaults to 1. Optional.

Major_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a major alarm. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than critical percent.

Killer Trunk Specifies whether to enable or disable killer trunk supervision for this group. Enter 1 to enable monitoring; 0 to disable it.

Connect_To Specifies whether the trunk group is connected to an interchanged carrier. 1 means it is connected directly to an interchanged carrier; 2 indicates it is connected to a tandem switch.

Selection_Order Specifies the order to be used when selecting trunks from this trunk group to use for transporting a call. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 In order by the least idle used first1 In order by longest idle first.2 Ascending numeric order3 Descending numeric order.4 No allocation strategy5 Even CIC 6 Odd CID

Search_Depth Specifies the number of trunks at the top of idle list to search in order to find a terminating trunk on the same WMG as the trunk originating the call. Optional value from zero to 4095. Default is 0.

Call_Hand_Jurisdiction_Info Optional one to six character value used to provide jurisdiction information.

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Dedicated_VPN Specifies whether the trunk group is a virtual private network. Enter 0, n or N for No or 1, y or Y for Yes. Defaults to No.

Trigger_Type Optional value from 1 through 255 to indicate the trigger type.

Origination_ProfileOptional value from 1 through 255 that denotes the attributes of the BAF AMA records for originating calls. Default is 1.

Termination_Profile Optional value from 1 through 255 to indicate the attributes of the BAF AMA records for terminating calls. Default is 1.

Test_Call_IndicatorSpecifies whether a test call indication should be set in BAF AMA records. Optional. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

Network_Number Specifies an particular carrier or network for BAF AMA records. Optional. Can enter up to six alphanumeric characters.

Carrier_Type Denotes whether the carrier supports certain features as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Feature group B1 Feature group D 2 CAMA

MC164_CPN_OptionOptional indicator that shows whether the Module 164 Calling Party Number option of this trunk group is on or off. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

InterNetwork_CodeOptional entry up to four digits in length to identify the inter-connecting network for this trunk group.

COT_Frequency An optional value used to indicate the frequency of continuity tests on this trunk group. Enter 0 for no COT testing or a value from 1 through 16.

Hop_Count Optional value that specifies the initial value for the hop counter. The hop count refers to the number of nodes it takes a packet from its source to destination. Entry is optional. Values are 0 for off, or 10 through 20.

Alternate_Route Optional value that indicates whether alternate routing is allowed when encountering SS7 congestion or when the destination point (DPC) has paused. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 No alternate routing1 Alternate routing for congestion2 Alternate routing for DPC pause

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

LNP_GAP_Addr_TypeOptional specification that indicates whether the Generic Address Ported Number is used. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Redirect_Info Optional value that indicates whether the message includes a redirection information parameter. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Satellite Optional specification that indicates whether there is a satellite in the trunk group’s path. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Confusion_MessageOptional specification that indicates whether the confusion message can be sent. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Incoming_Setting Optional specification that indicates whether echo cancellation is always applied in both directions or adheres to GR-317. Enter N, n or 0 for No if echo cancellation is always applied in both directions; Y, y or 1 for GR-317.

Include_ST_Digit Specifies whether to include the ST digit at the end of the called party number. Optional. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Outgoing_Half Optional value that indicates whether outgoing half echo cancellation for outbound calls on this trunk in accordance with GR-317. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

COT_Local_SwitchOptional specification that indicates whether the local switch is involved in the continuity test. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

COT_Distant_SwitchSpecifies whether the distant switch is involved in the continuity test. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Far_End_ACL_Levels Specifies the switch congestion levels supported by far end switch. Optional value, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 ACL12 ACL23 ACL3

Force_Answer Specifies whether to send Forced Answer Signal to the gateway. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

ISUP Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Remote_Exg_Type Optional value that indicates the remote gateway type, as follows:

Value Meaning

1 RET_LOCAL2 RET_TOLL3 RET_MSC

Chrg_Num/Orig_Line_InfoOptional specification that indicates whether the IAM includes the charge number and originating line information. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Out_IAM_Cont_Jurisdiction_InfoOptional specification that indicates whether Jurisdiction Information parameter is to be included in the IAMN. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Original_Called_Num Specifies whether the Original Called Number is to be included in the IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Redirecting_NumberSpecifies whether Redirecting Number is to be included in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Non_LNP_GAP Specifies whether non-Local Number Portability Generic Address Parameter is to be included in IAM. Optional. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Generic_Name Optional Yes or No value to indicate whether Generic Name is to be included in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Redirect_CapabilityOptional Yes or No value to indicate whether the Redirect Capability is to be included in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Redirect_Counter Optional Yes or No value to indicate whether Redirect Counter will appear in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Carrier_Selection Optional Yes or No value to indicate whether the Carrier Selection information will be in the IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Precedence Specifies whether to pass precedence in outgoing IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

ISUP Trunk Group





OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the SS7GROUP resource context:

Del SS7GROUP User_Grp_Number=<value>

Mod SS7GROUP User_Grp_Number=value, { parameter1=value1, parameter2=value2, . . .}

From inside the SS7GROUP resource:


EXAMPLES Adding an ISUP trunk group interactively:

System/Groups/ISUP/Groups>add ss7group

User_Grp_Number: 010Translation_Group: 1Prefix_Translator: 1Network_Group: 1Direction: 1Orig_Screening_Class: 1Orig_Route_Modifier: 1Routing_Indicator: 1Outpulsing_CIC: 0009Bearer_Type: 1Test_Type: 1Carrier_ID: 0011Record_BN_Option: 0

DPC: 000-000-002OPC: 000-008-210Bk_Msg_Cont_Access_Transport: 1Incoming_Half: 1Network_Data: 1Network_Data=>Ntwk_Data_w/_Trk_Membr: 1Carrier_Info: 1

Added ISUP Group : 1010-SS7GROUP Successfully.

ISUP Trunk Group





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

To add the ISUP trunk group in a batch file:

:cd;cd Groups/ISUP/Groups;add ss7group User_Grp_Number=1010,Translation_Group=1,Translation_Group=1,Prefix_Translator=1,Network_Group=1,Direction=1,Orig_Screening_Class=1,Orig_Route_Modifier=1,Routing_Indicator=1,Outpulsing_CIC=0009,Bearer_Type=1,Test_Type=1,Carrier_ID=0011,Record_BN_Option=0,DPC=000-000-002,OPC=000-008-210,Bk_Msg_Cont_Access_Transport=1,Incoming_Half=1,Network_Data=1,Ntwk_Data_w/_Trk_Membr=1,Carrier_Info=1;cd;

Changing the carrier identification for an SS7GROUP resource interactively:

System/Groups/ISUP/Groups>mod ss7group user_grp_number=010, carrier_id=0002

Completed Successfully

Deleting an SS7GROUP resource:

System/Groups/ISUP/Groups>del ss7group user_grp_number=010

Completed Successfully

Trunk Group Bundle





6.27 Trunk Group Bundle

A trunk group bundle is multiple trunk groups identified by an index number. Each of these must be added to the system as a TRUNKGROUPBUNDLE resource.

NAME Trunk Group Bundle

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Trunk-Group-Bundle

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add TRUNKGROUPBUNDLE TRK2BundleNumber=<value>, [TRK2Name,] [TRK1Order,] [TRK1Group_Number,] , [TRK1Weigh,] [TRK1routeToMSF]

PARAMETERS TRK2BundleNumberRequired number used to uniquely identify the

group of trunks. The value must be in the range from 1 through 255.

TRK2Name An optional alphanumeric parameter used to provide a description of the trunk group bundle, up to 32 characters in length.

TRK1Order Optional number that can be used to define the ordering of groups for a bundle, in the range 1 through 65,535.

TRK1TrunkGroup_NumberUniquely identifies a trunk in the trunk group. Optional value in the range from 1 through 65535. Defaults to 1.

TRK1weight Optional value that denotes the traffic load factor of each member in the bundle. Calls are proportionally distributed across all trunk groups in the same bundle based on this value. Defaults to 0.

TRK1Route_to_same_MSFOptional value to indicate whether to route to the same MSF. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to N.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the trunk group bundle context:

Del <n>-TRUNKGROUPBUNDLE

Mod TRUNKGROUPBUNDLE TRK2Bundle_number=<value>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

From inside the trunk group bundle context:


Trunk Group Bundle





EXAMPLES Adding a trunk group bundle interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Trunk-Group-Bundle>add trunkgroupbundle, TRK2BundleNumber=4, TRK2bundleDesc=Test Trunk

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a trunk group:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Trunk-Group-Bundle;add trunkgroupbundle, trk2bundlenumber=4,trk2name=Test Trunk, trk1trunkgroup_number=4;cd;

Deleting a trunk group bundle:

Del 4-trunkgroupbundle

Changing a trunk group bundle:

Mod TRUNKGROUPBUNDLE TRK2Bundle_number=4, TRK1Order=5

BICC Trunk Group





6.28 BICC Trunk Group

Bearer Independent Call Control (BICC) feature provides a support for narrow band servicesover broadband transport without impacting the existing end-to-end service.

BICC protocol is an adaptation of the ISUP protocol definition, but it is not peer-to-peercompatible with ISUP. ISUP is extended to provide additional messages to transport BNC-IDand CODEC information needed for the ATM connections.

To provision a BICC trunk group, the user must first complete these tasks:

• Provision a Network Group.

• Provision routing parameters:

• Provision a Prefix Translator.

• Provision a Translation Group.

• Provision an Orig Route Modifier.

• Provision Carrier ID Codes.

• Provision a Signaling Gateway.

• Provision Destination Point Codes (DPCs)

• Provision Origination Point Codes (OPCs)

• Provision a Subscriber Group.

Any Barrier Independent Call Control (BICC) trunk groups in the system must be defined within the System/Groups/BICC context under Groups. To set up BICC trunk groups, you must create an BICCGROUP resource for each trunk group.

NAME BICC Trunk Group

CONTEXT System/Groups/BICC/Groups

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add BICCGROUP {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

PARAMETERS User_Grp_NumberThe system group number for this trunk. Required value in the range 1 to 9999999. Required.

WMG_Node_Number This is the node number assigned to the wireless media gateway (WMC) to which this trunk is attached. Available options are WMG nodes configured within the system. Required.


BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)


Direction The direction of message traffic allowed within this trunk group. Required value, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Two-way communications.1 Incoming only. 2 Outgoing only.

Orig_Screening_ClassThe screening class for a call terminating from the trunk group. Required value that must be within the range 1 through 1024.

Bearer_Type Required indicator to denote the type of traffic going over the trunk group. If the trunk group supports clear channel 64K transfer capability to the destination node then set it to UDI_RDI. If the trunk group does not support clear channel 64K transfer capability, due to the type of trunk used (e.g., MF) or the transmission equipment in the path, do not set it to UDI_RDI. Instead, consider setting it to 3.1KHz or voice.

If the trunk group supports MF channels, it can be set to either 3.1 KHz or voice. UDI_RDI trunk groups can be used to carry digital data, or Modem/FAX data or voice. The 3.1KHz trunk groups can be used to carry Modem/FAX data or voice. Trunk groups marked Voice can not be used to carry digital data. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 DATA_3_1KHZ1 UDI_RDI2 Voice

Originator_Profile Specifies the originator routing profile used for calls originating on this trunk group. Available options are based on the originator profiles provisioned in the system. Required.

BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Routing_Indicator Denotes how the trunk is connected to the destination (for BAF AMA records). Required. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 DIRECT1 TANDEM2 CAP_DIRECT_EO3 CAP_DIRECT_AP4 TANDEM_TSP_CAP5 TANDEM_LEC_EO6 MOBILE_POSITION_CENTER7 TANDEM_TO_CAMA

DPC This is the destination point code (DPC) for the trunk group, and serves as an index into the signaling gateway table. It must be entered in the format nnn-nnn-nnn, where nnn can range from 1 to 255, but must match existing point codes in the signaling gateway table. Required.

Min_CIC The smallest value for a CIC in the range of CICs provisioned for this trunk group. Required.

Max_Provisioned_CICThe largest value for a CIC in the range of CICs provisioned for this trunk group. Required.

Max_Used_CIC The largest value for a CIC currently used by this trunk group. Required.

OPC This is the origination point code (OPC) for the trunk group, and serves as an index into the signaling gateway table. This must be entered in the format nnn-nnn-nnn, where nnn can range from 1 to 255, but must match existing point codes in the signaling gateway table. Required.

In_Echo_SuppressionSpecifies whether echo suppression will be in effect for this trunk group. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Required.

Codec_Profile Specifies the profile type for this BICC trunk group, The only value for this is “1” for ituPCM64. Required.

Codec_Profile_SourceSpecifies the source of the codec. The only valid value here is “1” for ITU_CODE. Required.

BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Name Optional user-defined name for the trunk group.

Glare_Control Optional value that denotes what action to take in the event that signals are being received in both direction on a bidirectional trunk. Defaults to 2. Valid value are:

Value Meaning

0 Release control1 Take control2 Use CIC numbering

Guard_Timer The Guard Timer value in units of .25 seconds to represent 0 to 2 seconds. Defaults to 3. Values are:

Value Meaning


Forward_Path Required to indicate whether the trunk group cuts a forward path before the connect message. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Default is N.

Dir_Term_Per_ACL1Specifies the ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 1.Optional value from 1 to 100. Default is 0.

Dir_Term_Per_ACL2Specifies the ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 2. Optional value from 1 to 100. Default is 0.

Alt_Term_Per_ACL1Specifies the alternate ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 1. Optional value from 1 to 100. Default is 0.

Alt_Term_Per_ACL2 Specifies the alternate ACC direct termination percentage at ACL 2. Optional value from 1 to 100. Default is 0.

BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Control_Option Required to indicate whether the Automatic Congestion Control (ACC) option is used for this trunk group. Defaults to 1. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 ACC is not enabled for this trunk group.1 ACC is enabled for this trunk group.2 ACC on skip. 3 ACC on cancel.


Connect_To Specifies whether the trunk group is connected to an interchanged carrier. 1 means it is connected directly to an interchanged carrier; 2 indicates it is connected to a tandem switch. Defaults to 1. Optional.

Critical Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before a critical alarm is sent. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Defaults to 15. Optional.

Selection_Order Specifies the order to be used when selecting trunks from this trunk group to use for transporting a call. Defaults to 1. Optional. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 In order by the least idle used first.1 In order by longest idle first.2 Ascending numeric order3 Descending numeric order.4 No allocation strategy5 Even CIC 6 Odd CID

Search_Depth Specifies the number of trunks at the top of idle list to search in order to find a terminating trunk on the same WMG as the trunk originating the call. Optional value from zero to 4095. Default is 0. Optional.

Jurisdiction Optional one to six character value used to provide jurisdiction information. Optional.

Minor_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a minor alarm. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than major percent. Defaults to 5. Optional.

BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Major_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a major alarm. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than critical percent. Defaults to 10. Optional.

Killer Trunk Specifies whether to enable or disable killer trunk supervision for this group. Enter 1 to enable monitoring; 0 to disable it. Default is 0. Optional.

Dedicated_VPN Specifies whether the trunk group is a virtual private network. Default is N. Optional.

HPC_Capable Specifies whether this trunk is capble of high probability call completion as used with GETS. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Default is 0. Optional.

Origination_ProfileOptional value from 1 through 255 that denotes the attributes of the BAF AMA records for originating calls. Default is 2. Optional.

Termination_ProfileOptional value from 1 through 255 to indicate the attributes of the BAF AMA records for terminating calls. Default is 2. Optional.

Test_Call_Indicator Specifies whether a test call indication should be set in BAF AMA records. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No.

Network_Number Specifies an particular carrier or network for BAF AMA records. Optional. Can enter up to six alphanumeric characters. Optional.

Carrier_Type Optional value to denotes whether the carrier supports certain features. Must be set to 1 to indicate Feature group D is supported.

Hop_Count Optional value that specifies the initial value for the hop counter. The hop count refers to the number of nodes it takes a packet from its source to destination. Entry is optional. Values are 0 for off, or 10 through 20. Default is 20. Optional.

BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Alternate_Route Optional value that indicates whether alternate routing is allowed when encountering SS7 congestion or when the destination point (DPC) has paused. Default is 0. Optional.Values are:

Value Meaning

0 No alternate routing1 Alternate routing for congestion2 Alternate routing for DPC pause

User_Service_Info Specifies whether bits EDCBA of the first octet of the user service info parameter shall be coded 00000 for speech or 10000 for 3.1 KHz. Enter 1, y or Y for speech or 0, n or N for 3.1 Khz. Defaults to No. Optional.

Include_ATP Specifies whether a message is to include Access Transport Parameter. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No.

Include_RIP Specifies whether a message is to include Redirection Information Parameter. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

Satellite Specifies whether there is a satellite in the path. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

Echo_SuppressionSpecifies whether echo suppression is to be used. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

Confusion_Message Specifies whether the confusion message can be sent. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to Yes.

FGD_Access_NodeSet to 1, y or Y to indicate the FGD Access Node generic digit is expected in the IAM for the incoming trunk. Set to 0, n or N to indicate it is not. Defaults to No. Optional.

Switch_ID_RoutingSet to 1, y or Y to indicate the switch ID routing parameter is expected in the IAM for the incoming trunk. Set to 0, n or N to indicate it is not. Defaults to No. Optional.

Include_ST_Digit Set to 1, y or Y to indicate the network data parameter with trunk member is expected in backward messages for the incoming trunk. Set to 0, n or N to indicate it is not. Defaults to No. Optional.

NDP_with_Trunk MemberSet to 1, y or Y to indciate the network data parameter with trunk member is expected in backward messages for the incoming trunk. Set to 0, n or N to indicate it is not. Defaults to No. Optional.

BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

COT_Distant_SwitchSpecifies whether the distant switch is involved in the continuity test. Enter 0, n or N for No; 1, y or Y for Yes. Defaults to Yes. Optional.

Far_End_ACL_LevelsEnter one of the folloiwng to indicate the ACL congetions level supported. Defaults to 2. Optional.

Value Meaning

1 Select this option if you wish the system tosupport the least severe congestion level.

2 (Default) Select this option if you want the system to support a more severe congestion level.

3 Select this option if you wish the system to support the most severe congestion level.

CN/OLIP Specifies whether the IAM should include the Charge Number (CN) parameter and Originating Line Information Parameter (OLIP) as a pair in the outgoing message. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

CIP Specifies whether the Carrier Identification Parameter (CIP) should be included in the outgoing IAM message. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

JIP Specifies whether the Jurisdiction Information Parameter (JIP) should be included in the outgoing IAM message. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

OCN Specifies whether the Original Called Number (OCN) should be included in the outgoing IAM message. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

RN Specifies whether the redirecting number should be included in the outgoing IAM message. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

GAP Specifies whether the Generic Access Parameter should be included in the outgoing IAM message. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to No. Optional.

GN Specifies whether Generic Name is to be included in IAM. Enter 1, y or Y for Yes or 0, n or N for No. Defaults to Yes. Optional.

Redirect_CapabilityOptional Yes or No value to indicate whether the Redirect Capability is to be included in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

BICC Trunk Group





PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Redirect_Counter Optional Yes or No value to indicate whether Redirect Counter will appear in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

Carrier_Selection Optional Yes or No value to indicate whether the Carrier Selection information will be in the IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

TNS Specifies whether Transmit Network Selection is to be included in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Signal_Ported_Number Specifies whether a Generic Address Parameter for Local Number Portability is to be included in IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Optional.

Accept_TNS Specifies whether Transmit Network Selection should be included in the outgoing IAM message. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

Outpulse_FGD_Access_Node Specifies whether to include the Feature Group D Access Node Parameter in the outgoing IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

Pass_Precedence Specifies whether to pass precedence inthe outgoing IAM. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

Connection_Type Connection type for a BICC trunk group. (Not used or CISCO MGX.) Default is 1. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 ConnectNoInd1 ConnectBackward2 onnectForward

Incoming_Echo Indicates whether incoming echo suppression is implemente for this trunk group. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

BICC Trunk Group





OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a BICC trunk group, change to the System/Groups/BICC/Groups context and enter the following:

<n>-BICCGROUP

Where, in the above example, <n> is the User_Grp_Number for the BICC trunk to be deleted.

To modify a BICC trunk, first change to the System/Groups/BICC/Groups/<n>-BICCGROUP context, where <n> is the User_Grp_Number of the trunk you want to modify. Then, enter a command having the following syntax:

mod {parameter1=<value1>, parameter1=<value1>, . . . }

EXAMPLES Example of adding a BICC trunk group from the command prompt:

System/Groups/BICC/Groups>ADD BICCGROUP User_Grp_Number=24, Prefix_Translator=1, Originator_Profile=1, Carrier_ID=0015, Origination_Profile=2, Termination_Profile=2, Carrier_Type=1, Network_Number=22, Test_Call_Indicator=1, Bearer_Type=1, Selection_Order=0, Routing_Indicator=1, Connect_To=1, Orig_Screening_Class=1, Jurisdiction_Info=Goldenvillia, Dedicated_VPN=0, Search_Depth=0, Connection_Type=1, Direction=1, HPC_Capable=0

Command Successful

System/Groups/BICC/Groups>

BICC Trunk Group





EXAMPLES(CONT.)

Batch entry used to add a BICC trunk group:

cd;cd Groups/BICC/Groups;Add BICCGROUP

User_Grp_Number=24,Prefix_Translator=1,Originator_Profile=1,Carrier_ID=0015,Origination_Profile=2,Termination_Profile=2,Carrier_Type=1,Network_Number=10, Test_Call_Indicator=1,Bearer_Type=1,Selection_Order=0,Routing_Indicator=1,Connect_To=1,Orig_Screening_Class=1Jurisdiction_Info=Goldenvillia, Dedicated_VPN=0,Search_Depth=0,Connection_Type=1,Direction=1,HPC_Capable=0;

cd;

CAS Trunk Group





6.29 CAS Trunk Group

With Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) trunk groups each traffic channel has a dedicatedsignalling channel. The signalling for a particular traffic circuit is permanently associated withthat circuit. To provision a CAS trunk group, the user must first complete the following tasks:

• Configure an MSF node.

• Provision a subscriber group.

• Provision a network group.

• Provision a prefix translator.

• Provision a screening class.

• Provision a national translation group.

• Provision an originator route modifier.

• Provision a CIC route descriptor.

• Provision an outpulse map.

• Provision a feature group.

• Provision a CAS profile.

• Provision Screening Class.

NAME CAS Trunk Group

CONTEXT System/Groups/CAS-Trunk/Groups

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add CASTRUNKGROUP {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

PARAMETERS User_Grp_NumberThe group number for this trunk. Required value in the range 1 to 9999999.

CAS Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Group_Type The type of trunk group. Select an entry valid for CAS trunks. Required. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 ISUP1 PRI2 GR3033 CASTRK4 CASLN5 ATM6 CASDAL7 BICC8 CALEA9 VOIP10 TDM_INT11 BSSID12 SIP13 UTRAN




Direction The direction of message traffic allowed within this trunk group. Required value, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Two-way communications. (The associatedCAS profile must be provisioned with the Glare Control as Two Way Controller or Two Way Release.)

1 Incoming only. (The associated CAS profile mustbe provisioned with the Glare Control asIncoming.)

2 Outgoing only. (The associated CAS profile must be provisioned with the Glare Control as Outgoing.)

CAS Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

CNA_Trunk If the direction is “two-way” or “incoming traffic only,” you must specify whether this is a Connecting Network Access (CNA) trunk. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

Incoming_Recording If the direction specified for this trunk was “two-way” or “incoming traffic only,” and you indicated in the CNA_Trunk parameters that this is a CNA trunk, you must specify the recording option here, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Do not enable Chargeable Account NumberRecording (CNAR).

1 Record full CNAR data.

2 Record limited CNAR data.

Screening_Class Specify the call screening class for calls on this trunk group. Valid screening classes are based upon those already provisioned in the system.

Orig_Route_ModifierSpecifies the origination routing table to use to route calls incoming on this trunk group. The value you use must match a modifier configured for the system. (The input for these tables are in the Routing-and-Translation/Routing section, under Orig-Routing/Orig-Routing-Modifier.) Required.

Output_Pulse This is a value to outpulse for milliwatt tests on this trunk group. Required.

Carrier_ID Identification of the carrier for this trunk group. Required.

CAS_Profile Specifies the trunk group number the MSFs use. Required.

Record_BN_OptionIndicates whether the billing number is to be stored as part of the billing data for calls on this trunk. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Required. Defaults to No.

CAS Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Name Optional user-defined name for the trunk group.

Guard_Timer The Guard Timer value in units of .25 seconds to represent 0 to 2 seconds. Defaults to 3. Values are:

Value Meaning


Forward_Path Required to indicate whether the trunk group cuts a forward path before the connect message. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Default is N.


Connect_To Specifies whether the trunk group is connected to an interchanged carrier. 1 means it is connected directly to an interchanged carrier; 2 indicates it is connected to a tandem switch. Defaults to 1. Optional.

Critical Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before a critical alarm is sent. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Defaults to 15. Optional.

Minor_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a minor alarm. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than major percent. Defaults to 5. Optional.

Major_Per Threshold Percentage for “Out of Service” circuits in the trunk group before sending a major alarm. Optional value from 0 to 100 percent. Must be less than critical percent. Defaults to 10. Optional.

Killer_Trunk Specifies whether to enable or disable killer trunk supervision for this group. Enter 1 to enable monitoring; 0 to disable it. Default is 0. Optional.

CAS Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Selection_Order Specifies the order to be used when selecting trunks from this trunk group to use for transporting a call. Defaults to 0. Optional. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 In order by the least idle used first.1 In order by longest idle first.2 Ascending numeric order3 Descending numeric order.4 No allocation strategy5 Even CIC 6 Odd CID

Search_Depth Specifies the number of trunks at the top of idle list to search in order to find a terminating trunk on the same WMG as the trunk originating the call. Optional value from zero to 4095. Default is 0. Optional.

Jurisdiction_Info Optional one to six character value used to provide jurisdiction information. Optional.

Busy_Verification Specifies whether call originations on this trunk group are allowed to perform busy verication. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Required. Defaults to No.

Routing_Indicator Denotes how the trunk is connected to the destination for BAF AMA records. Required. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 DIRECT1 TANDEM2 CAP_DIRECT_EO3 CAP_DIRECT_AP4 TANDEM_TSP_CAP5 TANDEM_LEC_EO6 MOBILE_POSITION_CENTER7 TANDEM_TO_CAMA

Dedicated_VPN Indicates whether this trunk group is used only for a virtual private network (VPN). Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Required. Defaults to No.

Trigger_Type Optional value from 1 through 255 to indicate the trigger type.

CAS Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Bearer_Type Required indicator to denote the type of traffic going over the trunk group. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 DATA_3_1KHZ2 Voice

X-NPA_digit_ID 0-9 digits used for Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) signaling to identify the trunk group. Enter 10 to indicate that CAMA is not provisioned for this trunk group. Optional. Defaults to 10.

Test_Type Required code to indicate the type of trunk test to be performed on this group. Optional. Defaults to 0. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 TRKTEST_NON1 TRKTEST_COT2 TRKTEST_MW3 TRKTEST_MW_TDM4 TRKTEST_TONEGEN5 TRKTEST_SIGNALING6 TRKTEST_OUTPULSIN7 TRKTEST_ROUTINE8 TRKTEST_T1009 TRKTEST_T10210 TRKTEST_T10511 TRKTEST_T10812 TRKTEST_MW_INTERNODE

Milliwatt_DN The the directory number to use for milliwatt tone test calls from this trunk group. Optional.

Connect_To Connect_ToSpecifies whether the trunk group is connected to an interchanged carrier. 1 means it is connected directly to an interchanged carrier; 2 indicates it is connected to a tandem switch. Optional. Defaultst o 1.

Origination_ProfileOptional value from 1 through 255 that denotes the attributes of the BAF AMA records for originating calls. Optional. Default is 1.

Termination_Profile Optional value from 1 through 255 to indicate the attributes of the BAF AMA records for terminating calls. Optional. Default is 1.

CAS Trunk Group





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Orig_Line_Info_DigitsSpecifies the originating line information digits for the IAM messages from this trunk group. Used to indicate the class of service for this trunk group. Default is 8. Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 POTS1 Multiparty line2 ANI failure6 Station-level rating7 Special operator handling required8 Inter-LATA restricted10 Test call20 AIOD-listed DN sent23 Coin or noncoin on calls using database access24 800 service call27 Payphone using coin control signaling68 Inter-LATA restricted hotel70 Private paystations78 Inter-LATA restricted coinless93 Private virtual network255 No OLI

Test_Call_IndicatorSpecifies whether a test call indication should be set in BAF AMA records. Optional. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

Network_Number Specifies a particular carrier or network for BAF AMA records, up to six digits in length. Optional.

Carrier_Type Indicates the type of carrier for this trunk group, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Feature Group B1 Feature Group D2 CAMA

MC164_CPN_OptionSpecifies whether the Module 164 Calling Party Number option will be implemented for this trunk group.Optional. Enter N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes. Defaults to No.

InterNetwork_CodeThis is an optional value up to four digits in length that identifies the interconnecting network for this trunk group. Defaults to zero.

CAS Trunk Group





OTHER COMMANDS

To delete a CAS trunk group, change to the System/Groups/CAS-Trunk/Groups context and enter the following:

<n>-CASTRUNKGROUP

Where, in the above example, <n> is the User_Grp_Number for the CAS trunk to be deleted.

To modify a CAS trunk, first change to the System/Groups/CAS-Trunk/Groups/<n>-CASTRUNKGROUP context, where <n> is the User_Grp_Number of the the trunk you want to modify. Then, enter a command having the following syntax:

mod {parameter1=<value1>, parameter1=<value1>, . . . }

EXAMPLES Entering a CAS trunk interactively at the system command prompt:

System/Groups/CAS-Trunk/Groups>ADD CASTRUNKGROUP User_Grp_Number=1, Group_Type=3, Translation_Group=1, Prefix_Translator=119, Network_Group=1, Direction=2,CNA_Trunk=Y, Incoming_Recording=1, Screening_Class=0, Orig_Route_Modifier=4, Output_Pulse=1, Carrier_ID=0015, CAS_Profile=0, Record_BN_Option=Y, Name=Test Trunk 7 CAS

Command Successful

System/Groups/CAS-Trunk/Groups>

Example of a batch file entry used to add a CAS trunk:

cd;cd Groups/CAS-Trunk/Groups;add CASTRUNKGROUP

User_Grp_Number=1,Group_Type=3,Translation_Group=1,Prefix_Translator=119,Network_Group=1,Direction=2,CNA_Trunk=Y,Incoming_Recording=1,Screening_Class=0,Orig_Route_Modifier=4, Output_Pulse=1,Carrier_ID=0015,CAS_Profile=0,Record_BN_Option=Y,Name=Test Trunk 7 CAS;

cd;

UTRAN Trunk Group





6.30 UTRAN Trunk Group

UTRAN trunk groups are not currently supported in the Command Line Interface.

UTRAN Trunk Group





LRN List





6.31 LRN List

NAME LRN List

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/<n>-LRNLISTKEY

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add LRNLIST LRN=<value>, HLR_Number=<value>

PARAMETERS LRN Required local routing number up to 15 digits in length that serves as the index to the resource.

HLR_Number The entry here is a required HLR number. Valid HLR numbers are based upon previously provisioned HLR entries found under Office-Parameters/mobility-config-parameters/network-parameters as MSCNETWORK node resources. This is the Home Location Registry to search when this LRN is matched.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the LRNLIST context:

Del <n>-LRNLIST

Mod LRN=<value>, HLR_Number=<value>

From inside the LRNLIST context:

Mod HLR_Number=<value>

EXAMPLES Adding a LRNLIST interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-LRNLISTKEY>add LRNLIST LRN=1, HLR_Number=1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add an LRNLIST:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-LRNLISTKEY;add LRNLIST LRN=1, HLR_Number=1;cd;

Deleting an LRNLIST:

System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-lrnlistkey>del 2-lrnlist-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

LNP Order





6.32 LNP Order

NAME LNP Order

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/<n>-LNPLISTKEY

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add LNPLIST MSISDN_Pattern__with_CC=<value>, LNP_Order=<value>

PARAMETERS MSISDN_Pattern__with_CCRequired LNP digit pattern, up to 15 digits in length. This is the digit prefix representing a set of possible portable numbers.

LNP_Order Optional indicator to supply the LNP order, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Not Portable1 Portable. Search HLR frist, then NPDB.2 Portable. Search NPDB first, then HLR.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the LNPLIST context:

Del <n>-LNPLIST

Mod MSISDN_Pattern__with_CC=<value>, LNP_Order=<value>

From inside the LNPLIST list context:

Mod LNP_Order=<value>

EXAMPLES Adding a LNPLIST interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-LNPLISTKEY>add LNPLIST MSISDN_Pattern__with_CC=45, LNP_Order=2

Example of an entry in a batch file to add an LNPLIST:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-LNPLISTKEY;add LNPLIST MSISDN_Pattern__with_CC=45, LNP_Order=2;cd;

Deleting an LNPLIST:

System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-lrnlistkey>del 45-lnplist-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Call Screening





6.33 Call Screening

NAME Call Screening

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Call-Screening/Screening-Class

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add SCREENCLASS Class_Identifier=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS Class_Identifier Specifies a number that uniquely identifies the screening class. Required value up to 255 digits in length.

Name Provides a freeform entry for recording an optional name for the screening class, up to 32 characters in length.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the SCREENCLASS context:

Del <n>-SCREENCLASS

Mod SCREENCLASS=<value>, Name=<value>

From inside the SCREENCLASS context:

Mod Name=<value>

EXAMPLES Adding a SCREENCLASS interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Call-Screening/Screening-Class>add SCREENCLASS Class_Identifier=2, Namer=Test1

Example of an entry in a batch file to add an SCREENCLASS:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation;cd Call-Screening/Screening-Class;add SCREENCLASS Class_Identifier=2, Name=TestClass;cd;

Deleting an SCREENCLASS:

System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-lrnlistkey>del 2-SCREENCLASS-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

Termination Type





6.34 Termination Type

The termination type functionality allows the user to specify the types of calls a subscriber can originate.

NAME Termination Type

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Call-Screening/Termination-Type

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add TERMINATIONTYPE Termination_Type=<value>, Name=<value>

PARAMETERS Type_Identifier Specifies a number that uniquely identifies the termination type. Required value up to 255 digits in length.

Name Optional name for the termination type, up to 32 characters in length.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the TERMINATIONTYPE context:

Del <n>-TERMINATIONTYPE

Mod TERMINATIONTYPE Type_Identifier=<value>, Name=<value>

From inside the TERMINATIONTYPE context:

Mod Name=<value>

EXAMPLES Adding a TERMINATIONTYPE interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/Call-Screening/Termination-Type>add TERMINATIONTYPE Type_Identifier=45, Name=Test2

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a TERMINATIONTYPE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation;cd Call-Screening/Termination-Type>;add TERMINATIONTYPE Type_Identifier=2, Name=TestType;cd;

Deleting a TERMINATIONTYPE:

System/Office-Parameters/Network-Parameters/1-lrnlistkey>del 45-TERMINATIONTYPE-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful

MSISDN to HLR





6.35 MSISDN to HLR

To map a range of Mobile Subscriber numbers to their respective Home Location Register (HLR) database, you enter an SPMMSISDNHLR resource.

NAME MSISDN to HLR

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/MSISDN-to-HLR

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add SPMMSISDNHLR MSISDN_Begin=<value>, MSISDN_End=<value>, HLR_Number=<value>

PARAMETERS MSISDN_Begin Required beginning MSISDN value, up to 15 characters in length. The beginning and ending MSISDN values become part of the resource’s name.

MSISDN_End Required ending MSISDN value, up to 15 characters in length.The beginning and ending MSISDN value become part of the resource’s name.

HLR_Number Required HLR Number.Valid HLR numbers are based upon previously provisioned HLR entries found under Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Network-Parameters as MSCNETWORK node resources.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the SPMMSISDNHLR context:

Del <n>-SPMMSISDNHLR

Mod SPMMSISDNHLR MSISDN_Begin=<value>, MSISDN_End=<value>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

From inside the SPMMSISDNHLR context:


MSISDN to HLR





EXAMPLES Adding a SPMMSISDNHLR interactively:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/MSISDN-to-HLR>add SPMMSISDNHLR MSISDN_Begin=4501, MSISDN_End=4600, HLR_Number=12

Example of an entry in a batch file to add a SPMMSISDNHLR resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/MSISDN-to-HLR;add SPMMSISDNHLR, MSISDN_Begin=4501, MSISDN_End=4600, HLR_Number=12;cd;

Deleting a SPMMSISDNHLR from the CLI:

System/Office-Parameters/Routing-and-Translation/MSISDN-to-HLR>del 4-SPMMSISDNHLR-30065:Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N : ? Y

Command Successful



Alcatel-Lucent CLI Mobility Configuration


SECTION 7 CLI MOBILITY CONFIGURATION

Mobility resources identify network nodes to the softswitch. They identify the home network and the networks the softswitch communicates with. The mobility resources also control switch usage and identify the base station subsystems and other network elements in the softswitch. Provisioning mobility parameters involves provisioning these resources:

• Network Nodes

• Own MSC/VLR

• Neighboring MSC/VLR

• Equivalent MSC/PLMN

• MSC/PLMN

• RAN/BSS Entity

• GSM LAC/CELL

• Mobile Global Title/Allowed Roaming

• MSRN Distribution

• PLMN Restrictions

• LAC/CELL Restrictions

• Daylight Savings

• Time Zones

• HPLMN Network Codes

• IMEI Checking

• GSM Trace

This section explains how to set up the mobility configuration resources.

Mobility Configuration Query Commands



CLI Mobility Configuration Alcatel-Lucent


7.1 Mobility Configuration Query Commands

Commands used to perform queries from within the mobility configuration section of the wireless softswitch database are described below.

7.1.1 Showservices

NAME Showservices

DESCRIPTION Used to display the services associated with an IMSI.

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Subscriber-Query-by-IMSI-or-MSISDN

SYNTAX showservices imsi=<value>, basic_services=<value>, features=<value>

OPTIONS imsi The subscriber’s International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI). This is the number hardcoded in the SIM of subscriber’s mobile phone to uniquely identify the user assigned to that particular device.

basic_services A code representing a set of features.

features A code representing the features to display.

EXAMPLES The following command displays the features for basic service group 1, feature group 1:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Subscriber-Query-by-IMSI-or-MSISDN>showservices imsi=310910400000650

Basic_Service:1Feature:1VLRSUBQUERY:-Line Identification:

Override_Mode [Override Mode].......OVR_ENABLE_WITH_PLMN -> 0

eMLPP Info:

Max_Entitle_Priority [Max Entitle Priority].......maxPrio_0 -> 0Default_Priority [Default Priority].......defPrio_0 -> 0

Mobility Configuration Query Commands



Alcatel CLI Mobility Configuration


7.1.2 VLRSubdel

EXAMPLE (CONT.)

Features:

Registered [Registered].......Y->1Basic_Service [Basic Service].......BS_SPEECH -> 1Provisioned [Provisioned].......Y->1Feature [Feature].......SS_CFB -> 1Active/Operative [Active/Operative].......Y->1Quiscent [Quiscent].......N->0Call Forwarding:

Numbering_Plan [Numbering Plan].......NUM_PLAN_ISDN -> 1Notify_Forwarding_Party [Notify Forwarding Party].......N->0No_Reply_Timer [No Reply Timer].......0Forward_To_Number [Forward To Number].......15615614000Notify_Calling_Party [Notify Calling Party].......N->0Redirect_Presentation [Redirect Presentation].......N->0Numbering_Type [Numbering Type].......NUM_TYPE_INTERNATIONAL -> 1

Command Successful

FILES None.

SEE ALSO VLRSubquery, VLRSubdel.

NAME VLRSubdel

DESCRIPTION Used to purge the data for a subscriber from the vistor location registry (VLR) by entering the subscriber’s IMSI.


SYNTAX vlrsubquery imsi=<value>


EXAMPLES The following command deletes a subscriber from the registry:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Subscriber-Query-by-IMSI-or-MSISDN>vlrsubdel imsi=3101502144688431


FILES None.

SEE ALSO VLRSubquery, Showservices.

VLRSubquery





7.2 VLRSubquery

NAME VLRSubquery

DESCRIPTION Used to display a subscriber record from the vistor location registry (VLR) by entering the subscriber’s IMSI or MSISDN.


SYNTAX vlrsubquery {imsi=<value>|msisdn=<value>}


msisdn The subscriber’s Mobile Station Integrated Services Digital Network (MSISDN). This is the number one would dial to call the subscriber.

EXAMPLE The following command queries the registry for the subscriber information:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Subscriber-Query-by-IMSI-or-MSISDN>vlrsubquery imsi=310910400000510

Reformatting Page. Please wait ...VLRSUBQUERY:-eMLPP Info:

eMLPP Info:

Max_Entitle_Priority [Max Entitle Priority].......-1Default_Priority [Default Priority].......-1

Subscription Info:

O-CSI [O-CSI].......-1D-CSI [D-CSI].......-1SMS-CSI [SMS-CSI].......-1TIF_CSI [TIF-CSI].......Y->1VT-CSI [VT-CSI].......-1MM_CSI [SS-CSI].......Y->1

IMSI Flags:

Non-Dormant [Non-Dormant].......Y->1SM_Not_Reachable [SM Not Reachable].......N->0IMSI_Detached_2 [IMSI Detached].......Y->1Not_Purged [Not Purged].......Y->1

VLRSubquery





EXAMPLE (CONT.)

General Data:

Int__Out_Calls [Int. Out Calls].......N->0Double_Chargeable_ECT [Double Chargeable ECT].......N->0SS_Access [SS Access].......N->0PRE_Outgoing_Calls [PRE Outgoing Calls].......N->0Iz/Int__Non-HPLMN_Out_Calls [Iz/Int. Non-HPLMN Out Calls].......N->0Interzonal_Outgoing_Calls [Interzonal Outgoing Calls].......N->0Interzonal_ECT [Interzonal ECT].......N->0Iz_Non-HPLMN_Out_Calls [Iz Non-HPLMN Out Calls].......N->0Int__ECT [Int. ECT].......N->0Int__Non-HPLMN_Out_Calls [Int. Non-HPLMN Out Calls].......N->0All_Out_Calls [All Out Calls].......N->0Chargeable_ECT [Chargeable ECT].......N->0All_ECT [All ECT].......N->0Multiple_ECT [Multiple ECT].......N->0PRI_Out_Calls [PRI Out Calls].......N->0

Features:

Registered [Registered].......Y->1Feature [Feature].......-1Active/Operative [Active/Operative].......Y->1Quiscent [Quiscent].......Y->1Basic_Service [Basic Service].......-1Provisioned [Provisioned].......Y->1

Tele Services:

SMS_PTP-MT [SMS PTP-MT].......N->0SMS_PTP-MO [SMS PTP-MO].......N->0Press Enter for More Output :

Command Successful

FILES None.

SEE ALSO VLRSubdel, Showservices.

MSC Network Nodes





7.3 MSC Network Nodes

The Mobile Switching Center (MSC) node definitions identify the nodes in the network to the local MSC. These include nodes acting as an MSC, Visitor Location Register (VLR), Home Location Register (HLR), and all other node types. These nodes become the nodes “known” to the local wireless softswitch.

Some other resource types cannot reference nodes until they are added to the Network-Nodes context. This topic explains how to set up the Network-Nodes resources.

NAME MSC Network Nodes

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Network-Nodes

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add MSCNETWORKNODE Dual_HLR=<value>, Node_ID=<value>, Node_Type_1=<value>, Local=<value>, Standard=<value>, Routing_Choice=<value>, Network_ID=<value>, [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .]

PARAMETERS Dual_Hlr Required Dual Home Location Register (HLR) value.

Node_ID Required value to establish a unique identifier for this network node. This becomes the index into the table of network nodes. (Example: 5-MSCNETWORKNODE, where 5 is the Node ID of the network node.) Values can range from 1 through 65535.

Node_Type_1 Required code that indicates the type of node, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Mobile Switching Center (MSC). 1 Visitor Location Register (VLR)2 GSM Home Location Register (HLR)3 Service Control Point (SCP)4 Short Message Service Center (SMS-C)5 Equipment Identification Register (EIR)6 Number Portability Database (NPDB)7 Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC)8 ANSI-41 HLR9 NSS Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC)10 Serving GPRS Support Node MSC (SGSN MSC)

Local Required indicator that specifies whether the node is local, meaning it is within the Public LAN Mobile Network (PLMN) or remote, meaning it is outside of the PLMN. Values are N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

Standard Required indicator that specifies whether the node is standard or customized. Values are N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

MSC Network Nodes





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Routing_Choice Required value that indicates the type of routing used at the node. It gives the rules for the various types of network nodes and their routing strategy, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Global Title Translation (GTT). Called number is sent to GTT for conversion of the E.164 address to the point code of the node. This is themost used option.

1 Point Code (PC). Route by point code.

2 GTT PC. Route by sending both the E.164 address and

the point code; if the GTT is not available, the point code is used.

3 PC/ADDR. Route by sending both the E.164 address and the point code; if the point code routing fails,the call is sent to the GTT.

4 Called Number. Route using the called number.

5 Uses the called number first, then the GTT.

6 Uses the called number first, then the point code.

Network_ID Required network identifier.

Description Optional alphanumeric description of the node.

MAP_Version Optional value that specifies the MAP version used for the MSC/VLR, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Use MAP stack1 MAP version 12 MAP version 23 MAP version 34 MAP version 4

Intl_Fmt_Addr_E_164Optional value that specifies the International Telecommunications Union -- Telecom Section (ITU-T) E.164 address for the node, up to 15 digits in length.

Nature_of_AddressOptional value that specifies the nature of the address, in the range 0 through 127.

Digit_Translation_TypeOptional value that specifies the digit translation type, in the range 0 through 255.

MSC Network Nodes





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

CAMEL_Ph1 Optional indicator that specifies whether Customized Applications for Mobile Enhanced Logic (CAMEL) Phase1 is supported. Values are N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

CAMEL_Ph2 Optional indicator that specifies whether CAMEL Phase 2 is supported. Values are N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

CAMEL_Ph3 Optional indicator that specifies whether CAMEL Phase 3 is supported. Values are N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.

GTT_Coding_Format Optional value that specifies the GTT coding format, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Non-standard1 ITU ANSI12 ANSI3 ITU34 ITU

Point_Code Optional value that gives the point code of the network node.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-MSCNETWORKNODE

Mod MSCNETWORKNODE Node_ID=<n>, [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .]

In the above example, <n> is the Node_Id value for the resource. From inside the resource context you don’t have to give the Node_Id, as follows:

Mod [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . ]

EXAMPLES Adding an MSCNETWORKNODE resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Network-Nodes>add MSCNETWORKNODE Dual_HLR=0, Node_ID=4, Node_Type_1=2, Local=Y, Standard=Y, Routing_Choice=0, Network_ID=1

Command Successful

MSC Network Nodes





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Network-Nodes;add MSCNETWORKNODE

Dual_HLR=0, Node_ID=4, Node_Type_1=2, Local=Y, Standard=Y, Routing_Choice=0, Network_ID=1,GTT_Coding_Format=3;

cd;

Deleting the MSCNETWORKNODE resource from the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Network-Nodes>del 4-MSCNETWORKNODE


Modifying the MSCNETWORKNODE resource at the command prompt while outside the resource context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Network-Nodes>mod MSCNETWORKNODE Node_ID=4, GTT_Coding_Format=2

Command Successful


System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Network-Nodes/4-MSCNETWORKNODE>mod GTT_Coding_Format=2

Command Successful

Fields used as keys, such as the Node_ID, may not be modified. To change these values, you must delete the resource and add a new one.

Own MSC/VLR





7.4 Own MSC/VLR

The MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE resource is used to identify the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and Visitor Location Register (VLR) combinations that represent the local wireless softswitch. It also supplies the mobile country code (MCC) and mobile network code (MNC) associated with each MSC/VLR combination.

The MSC node and its VLR node must be provisioned in the Network-Nodes section before its MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE resource can be provisioned. (See “MSC Network Nodes” for more information.)

NAME Own MSC/VLR

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Own-MSC-or-VLR

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE MSC_ID= <value>, VLR_ID= <value>, Description= <value>, Mobile_Country_Code= <value>, Mobile_Network_Code=<value>, [Phase_1=<value>,] [Phase_2=<value>,] [Phase_3=<value>]

PARAMETERS MSC_ID The MSC identifier for the switch. It must match a Node_Id value defined for an MSC in the Network-Nodes section. This is required.

VLR_ID This is the identifier for the VLR to associate with this MSC. It must match a Node_Id value defined for a VLR node in the Network-Nodes section. This is required.

Description Radio network name or other free format description for the node. Optional.

Mobile_Country_CodeA required Mobile Country Code for the node. It must be three digits in length.

Mobile_Network_CodeSpecifies the required Mobile Network Code for the node, identifying the owner of the network. It must be at least two digits in length, but no more than three.

Phase_1 Indicates whether CAMEL phase 1 is supported. Optional. Values are N, n or 0 for No; Y, y or 1 for Yes.



Own MSC/VLR





OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE

Mod MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE MSC_Id=<n>, [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .]

In the above example, <n> is the value of the MSC_Id for the resource. From inside the resource context you don’t have to give the MSC_Id, as follows:


EXAMPLES Adding an MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Own-MSC-or-VLR>add MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE MSC_ID= 1, VLR_ID=2, Description=Local MSC, Mobile_Country_Code=310, Mobile_Network_Code=150, Phase_3=Y

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd Own-MSC-or-VLR;ADD MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE

MSC_ID= 1, VLR_ID=2, Description=Local MSC, Mobile_Country_Code=310, Mobile_Network_Code=150, Phase_3=Y;

cd;

Deleting a MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE resource at the command prompt with an MSC_Id equal to “4”:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Own-MSC-or-VLR>del 4-MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE


Own MSC/VLR





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

Modifying the MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE resource from the command prompt while outside the resource context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Own-MSC-or-VLR>mod MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE MSC_ID= 1, Mobile_Network_Code=10, Phase_3=N;

Command Successful


System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Own-MSC-or-VLR/4-MSCCFGMSCSYSTABLE>mod Mobile_Network_Code=10, Phase_3=N

Command Successful

Fields used as keys may not be modified. To change these values, you must delete the resource and add a new one.

Neighboring MSC/VLR





7.5 Neighboring MSC/VLR

The neighboring MSC/VLR resources, called MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD resources, are used to define the remote Mobile Switch Center (MSC) termination points where the local MSC can hand off a call. The Visitor Location Register (VLR) for the MSC must be specified in the MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD resource. An MSC node and a VLR node for this resource must be provisioned in the Network-Nodes section before this resource can be provisioned.(See “Network Nodes” in this document for more information.)

NAME Neighboring MSC/VLR

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Neighborhood-MSC-or-VLR

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD Location_Area_Code=<value>, MSC_ID=<value>, VLR_ID=<value>, Mobile_Country_Code=<value>, Mobile_Network_Code=<value>, [Description=<value>,] [Availability=<value>]

PARAMETERS Location_Area_CodeThis is the area code of the neighboring MSC where the local MSC can hand off a call. Required

MSC_ID MSC identifier of the neighboring MSC. It must match a Node_Id value defined for an MSC in the Network-Nodes section. Required.

VLR_ID VLR identifier for the neighboring MSC. It must match a Node_Id value defined for a VLR type of node in the Network-Nodes section. Required.

Mobile_Country_CodeRequired Mobile Country Code (MCC) for the node. It must be three digits in length.

Mobile_Network_CodeSpecifies a required Mobile Network Code (MNC) for the node, identifying the owner of the network. It must be at least two digits in length, but no more than three.

Description Required radio network name, or other free-form description, for the node.

Availability Indicates whether the resource is locked or unlocked.

Neighboring MSC/VLR





OTHER COMMANDS


Del <mcc>-<mnc>-<lac>-MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD

Mod MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD Location_Area_Code=<lac>, Mobile_Country_Code=<mcc>, Mobile_Network_Code=<value>, [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .]

In the above example, <mcc> is the value of the Mobile_Country_Code, <mnc> is the Mobile_Network_Code and <lac> is the Location_Area_Code. Together, these make a unique key for the resource. From inside the resource context you don’t have to give the keys, as follows:


EXAMPLES Adding an MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Neighborhood-MSC-or-VLR>add MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD Location_Area_Code=214, MSC_ID= 1, VLR_ID=2, Description=Local MSC, Mobile_Country_Code=310, Mobile_Network_Code=150

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd Neighborhood-MSC-or-VLR;ADD MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD

Location_Area_Code=214,MSC_ID= 1, VLR_ID=2, Description=Neighborhood MSC, Mobile_Country_Code=310, Mobile_Network_Code=150;

cd;

Deleting a MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Neighborhood-MSC-or-VLR>del 310-150-214-MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD


Neighboring MSC/VLR





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

Modifying the MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD resource from the command prompt while outside the resource context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Own-MSC-or-VLR>mod MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD Location_Area_Code=214, Mobile_Network_Code=150, MSC_ID= 1, Mobile_Network_Code=149;Command Successful


System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Own-MSC-or-VLR/4-MSCCFGNEIGHBHOOD>mod Mobile_Network_Code=150

Command Successful

Fields used as keys may not be modified. To change these values, you must delete the resource and add a new one.

MSC Equivalent PLMN List





7.6 MSC Equivalent PLMN List

The PLMNLIST resource is used to specify alternate networks where calls can be redirected as required.

NAME MSC Equivalent PLMN List

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-Equivalent-PLMN-List

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add PLMLIST Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=<value>, Equivalent_MCC=<value>, Equivalent_MNC=<value>, [Description=<value>]

PARAMETERS Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id Automatically generated equivalent PLMN list identifier. Required.

Equivalent_MCC Specifies the equivalent mobile country code. Must be three digits in length. Required.

Equivalent_MNC Specifies the equivalent mobile network code. Must be two or three digits in length. Required.

Description Optional user-defined description of the PLMLIST.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-<mcc>-<mnc>-PLMNLIST

Mod PLMNLIST Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=<n>, Equivalent_MCC=<mcc>, Equivalent_MNC=<mnc>, Description=<value>

In the above example, <n> is the Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id, <mcc> is the Equivalent_MCC and <mnc> is the Equivalent_MNC. Together, these make a unique key for the resource. You may not modify the key values, only the description. If you need to change the key values, you must first delete the resource then re-add it with the correct values. From inside the resource context you don’t have to give the keys:

Mod Description=<value>

MSC Equivalent PLMN List





EXAMPLES Adding an PLMNLIST resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-Equivalent-PLMN-List>add PLMNLIST Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=1, Equivalent_MCC=011, Equivalent_MNC=150, Description=Test Alternative Network

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd MSC-Equivalent-PLMN-List;ADD PLMNLIST

Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=1, Equivalent_MCC=011, Equivalent_MNC=150, Description=Test Alternative Network;

cd;

Deleting a PLMNLIST resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-Equivalent-PLMN-List>del 1-011-150-PLMNLIST


MSC PLMN





7.7 MSC PLMN

The Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) resource provides descriptive information about the public networks. Before creating this resource, you must set up the MSC Equivalent PLMN List. (See “MSC Equivalent PLMN List.”)

NAME MSC PLMN

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-PLMN

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add PLMN PLMN_Id=<value>, Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=<value>, Description=<value>, [Short_Network_Name=<value>,] [Full_Network_Name=<value>]

PARAMETERS PLMN_Id Automatically generated PLMN identifier. The valid value is the next integer in sequence.

Equivalent_PLMN_List_IdThis is a required index into the MSC Equivalent PLMN list. It is used to locate alternate networks in the list where calls can be redirected as required. (See “MSC Equivalent PLMN List.”)

Description Required description of the PLMN, up to 32 characters in length.

Short_Network_Name Optional user-defined short name for the PLMN, up to 32 characters in length.

Full_Network_Name Optional user-defined full name for the PLMN, up to 32 characters in length.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-PLMN

Mod PLMN PLMN_Id=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

In the above example, <n> is the PLMN_Id. From inside the resource context you don’t have to give the PLMN_Id:


MSC PLMN





EXAMPLES Adding a PLMN resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-PLMN>add PLMN PLMN_Id=2, Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=0, Description=Tropical Network, Short_Network_Name=TropNet, Full_Network_Name=Tropical Network Systems, Inc.

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd MSC-PLMN;ADD PLMN

PLMN_Id=2, Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=0, Description=Tropical Network, Short_Network_Name=TropNet, Full_Network_Name=Tropical Systems Network , Inc.;

cd;

Deleting a PLMN resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-PLMN>del 2-PLMN


Changing a PLMN resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-PLMN>MOD PLMN,PLMN_Id=2, Equivalent_PLMN_List_Id=32Command Successful

MSC MCC/MNC





7.8 MSC MCC/MNC

The MCCMNC resource is used to establish the country codes and network codes for the Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMN) that will be recognized by the local Mobile Switching Center (MSC).

To create the MCCMNC resource, you must first set up the PLMNLIST and PLMN resources. (See “MSC Equivalent PLMN List” and “MSC PLMN” in this document.) You may then create the MCCMNC resource to assign the country and network codes to the MSC PLMN.

NAME MSC MCC/MNC

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-MCC-and-MNC

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add MCCMNC Mcc_Mnc_Id=<value>, PLMN_Id=<value>, Mobile_Country_Code=<value>, Mobile_Network_Code=<value>, Description=<value>

PARAMETERS Mcc_Mnc_Id Required identifier for this instance of an MCCMNC resource. It is an automatically generated value one higher than the last MCCMNC resource added.

PLMN_Id Required identifier of an existing PLMN resource for which you are assigning country codes and network codes. You may select only the PLMN_Id of existing PLMN resources. (See “MSC PLMN” in this document)

Mobile_Country_Code This is the required numeric country code you are assigning to the PLMN. This code should be three digits in length.

Mobile_Network_CodeThis is the required numeric network code you are assigning to the PLMN. It can be two or three digits in length.

Description A description of the PLMN/MCC/MNC relationship is required, up to 32 characters in length.

Access Type Indicates whether the network is accessed using Unlicensed Mobile Access (UMA) or GSM. Enter 0 for GSM or 1 for UMA. Defaults to 0 for GSM.

MSC MCC/MNC





OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-MCCMNC

Mod MCCMNC Mcc_Mnc_Id=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

In the above example, <n> is the Mcc_Mnc_Id. From inside the resource context you don’t have to give the Mcc_Mnc_Id:


EXAMPLES Adding an MCCMNC resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-MCC-and-MNC>add MCCMNC Mcc_Mnc_Id=3, PLMN_Id=3, Mobile_Country_Code=011, Mobile_Network_Code=44, Description=Test PLMN/MCC/MNC

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd MSC-MCC-and-MNC;ADD MCCMNC

Mcc_Mnc_Id=3, PLMN_Id=3, Mobile_Country_Code=011, Mobile_Network_Code=44, Description=Test PLMN/MCC/MNC,Access_Type=0;

cd;

Deleting a MCCMNC resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-MCC-and-MNC>del 3-MCCMNC


Changing a MCCMNC resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSC-MCC-and-MNC>MOD MCCMNC Mcc_Mnc_Id=3, Description=Test Change to Description 89012

Command Successful

RAN/BSS Entity





7.9 RAN/BSS Entity

A RAN/BSS Entity resource, named EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK, is used to identify each base station subsystem associated with the local softswitch. An SS7 configuration must already exist in the Signaling Gateway before a BSS can be added. In addition, a BSS Group will need to be added for the BSS entities.

NAME RAN/BSS Entity

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/RAN-or-BSS-Entity

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK Radio_Network_Id=<value>, Network_ID=<value>, Point_Code=<value>, Lata_Num=<value>, Version=<value>, RNC_Id=<value>, SMLC_Type=<value>, SMLC_Node_Num=<value>, [Description=<value>,] [ANSI_or_ETSI_CIC_Coding=<value>]

PARAMETERS Radio_Network_Id Radio network identification unique to each base station. This is a required value that can range from 0 through 32767.

Network_ID Required value that identifies the network.

Point_Code Specifies the destination point code for this base station. This must be entered in the format nnn-nnn-nnn, where nnn can range from 1 through 255.

Lata_Number This is a required local access and transport area (LATA) number for the base station.This is a three-digit value used in the United States to indicate the area for local calls. Defaults to 0.

Version Required number that indicates the version of the base station, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Indicates it is a 2G station, using the Base StationSubsystem Application specification (BSSAP) forGSM.

1 Indicates it is a 3G station, using the Radio Network Application specification (RNAP) for UMTS.

3 Indicates the base station is a Voice-over-IP (VOIP)station.

RAN/BSS Entity





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

RNC_Id If the Version is RNAP, you must enter the RNC identifier. It can be from 0 through 4095. Default is 0.

Smlc_Type Required number that indicates the type of serving mobile location center (SMLC) that the base station uses. It is the kind of server in the radio network that handles requests for the location of a mobile user, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 BSS SMLC1 NSS SMLC

SMLC_Node_Num If the SML_Type specified is NSS SMLC, you must give the identity of the SMLC node. This value can range from 0 through 999.

Description This is an optional user-defined description of the RAN or BSS entity, up to 32 characters in length.

ANSI_or_ETSI_CIC_CodingOptional indicator that tells whether the RAN or BSS entity uses ANSI or ETSI standards for their CIC coding. If it uses T1 ANSI standards, the value is 0; for ETSI, or the E1 standard, it is 1.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete or change the RAN/BSS resource from outside its context:

del EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK

mod EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK Radio_Network_Id=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter1=<value1>, . . . }

In the above example, <n> is the Radio_Network_Id. From inside the resource context you do not have to give the Radio_Network_Id:

mod EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK {parameter1=<value1>, parameter1=<value1>, . . . }

RAN/BSS Entity





EXAMPLES Adding an EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/RAN-or-BSS-Entity>add EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK Radio_Network_Id=967, Network_ID=6, Point_Code=192-22-68, Lata_Num=704, Version=1, SMLC_Type=0

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/RAN-or-BSS-Entity;

ADD EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK Radio_Network_Id=967, Network_ID=6, Point_Code=192-22-68, Lata_Num=704, Version=1, SMLC_Type=0;

cd;

Deleting a EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/RAN-or-BSS-Entity>del 967-EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK


Modifying the EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK resource from the command prompt while outside the resource context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/RAN-or-BSS-Entity>mod EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK Radio_Network_Id=967, SMLC_Type=1Command Successful


System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/RAN-or-BSS-Entity>967-EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK>mod SMLC_Type=1Command Successful

GSM LAC Cell Range





7.10 GSM LAC Cell Range

The MSCCFGGSMLACCELL resource is used to set up the GSM Location Area Code (LAC) and cell information for each group of cells to be recognized by the MSC. It is used to link these cell groups to the Radio Access Network (RAN) identifier or Base Station Subsystem identifier to which they belong. Consequently, the RAN or BSS must be set up in the system before creating the MSCCFGGSMLACCELL. (See “RAN/BSS Entity” in this document for more information.)

Additionally, the MSCFGGSMLACCELL resources link the cell groups to their respective country codes and network codes. Because the MCCMNC resources are where the country codes and network codes are defined to the MSC, this means you will must add the MCCMNC resources before creating the MSCCFGGSMLACCELL resources. (See “MSC MCC/MNC” in this document for more information.)

Finally, time zones must be set up in TIMEZONEDIS resources before you can specify time zones for the cells, if they differ from the local MSC’s time zone. (See “Time Zone Distribution” for more information.)

NAME GSM LAC CELL

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/GSM-LAC-or-CELL

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add MSCCFGGSMLACCELL Mcc_Mnc_Id=<value>, Location_Area_Code=<value>, Radio_Network_ID=<value>, Description=<value>, TimeZone_Index=<value>, Single_BSC=<value>, Sector=<value>, Begining_Cell=<value>, Ending_Cell=<value>, Prod_Descriminator=<value>

PARAMETERS Mcc_Mnc_Id This is a required country code and network code identifier. The value you enter must match an Mcc_Mnc_Id from the MCCMNC resources listed under the MSC-MCC-and-MNC context. (See “MSC MCC/MNC” in this document for more informations.)

Location_Area_Code Required location area code (LAC). It must be a value in the range 0 through 65535.

Radio_Network_ID This is a required radio network identifier. It must match a Radio_Network_ID listed under the RAN-or-BSS-Entity context as defined in the EMSVLRCFGRADIONETWORK resources. (See “RAN/BSS Entity” in this document for more information.)

GSM LAC Cell Range





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Description Required description of the LAC/CELL, up to 32 characters in length.

TimeZone_Index Required time zone index that gives the time zone for the cells. Time zones must be pre-configured before their indexes can be used to specify the time zone for the cell group. (See “Time Zone Distribution” for more information.)

Single_BSC Required to indicate whether this location uses a single base station controller (BSC) or more than one. Values can be 0 to indicate more than one BSC is used or 1 to indicate only one BSC is used.

Sector Required numeric user-defined sector identifier or type code for the group of cells, up to 15 digits in length.

Begining_Cell Required numeric cell identifier in the range 0 to 65535 that specifies the starting cell in the group of cells being defined. The Begining_Cell value must be less than the Ending_Cell value.

Ending_Cell Required numeric cell identifier in the range 0 to 65535 that specifies the ending cell in the group of cells being defined. The Begining_Cell value must be less than the Ending_Cell value.

Prod_DescriminatorRequired numeric product discriminator.

OTHER COMMANDS

To delete or change the MSCCFGGSMLACCELL resource from outside its context:

del <mccmncid>-<lac>-<beg>-<end>-MSCCFGGSMLACCELL

mod MSCCFGGSMLACCELL Mcc_Mnc_Id=<mccmncid>, Location_Area_Code=<lac>, Begining_Cell=<beg>, Ending_Cell=<end>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter1=<value1>, . . . }

In the above example, <mccmncid> is the MCC_MNC_Id, <lac> is the Location_Area_Code, <beg> is the Begining_Cell and <end> is the Ending_Cell value. Together, these are the keys to the resource and must be entered to delete or modify the resource. From inside the resource context, though, you do not have to specify the keys to make changes.

mod MSCCFGGSMLACCELL {parameter1=<value1>, parameter1=<value1>, . . . }

You cannot modify the keys using the mod command. If you need to change them, you must first delete the resource then re-enter it using different key values.

GSM LAC Cell Range





EXAMPLES Adding an MSCCFGGSMLACCELL resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/GSM-LAC-or-CELL>Add MSCCFGGSMLACCELL Mcc_Mnc_Id=12, Location_Area_Code=432, Radio_Network_ID=967, Description=Cell Group Test, TimeZone_Index=0, Single_BSC=1, Sector=12, Begining_Cell=450, Ending_Cell=599, Prod_Descriminator=1

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/GSM-LAC-or-CELL;

ADD MSCCFGGSMLACCELL Mcc_Mnc_Id=12, Location_Area_Code=432, Radio_Network_ID=967, Description=Cell Group Test, TimeZone_Index=0, Single_BSC=1, Sector=12, Begining_Cell=450, Ending_Cell=599, Prod_Descriminator=1;

cd;

Deleting an MSCCFGGSMLACCELL resource from outside its context:

del 12-432-450-599-MSCCFGGSMLACCELL

Modifying an MSCCFGGSMLACCELL from inside the resource context:

mod MSCCFGGSMLACCELL {parameter1=<value1>, parameter1=<value1>, . . . }

Global Title Allowed Roaming





7.11 Global Title Allowed Roaming

The CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE resources are used to control whether the calls from certain subscribers are processed by the local, or “home,” softswitch. Each of these resources contains the first few digits, or the “prefix,” of International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) phone numbers. The home softswitch will process IMSI’s that have the given prefix.

Each prefixes that the softswitch will process must also contain a flag set to “active.” Active IMSI prefixes include those from the softswitch’s home network as well as those from other Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMN) that the local softswitch agrees to process.

You can include prefixes that you do not want to route by setting their “active” flag to “No.” The softswitch will not route calls containing prefixes that have their active flag set to “No.”

Before creating these resources the Home Location Directory nodes must be added to the Network-Nodes section. (See “MSC Network Nodes” in this document for more information.)

NAME Global Title Allowed Roaming

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Mobile-Global-Title-or-Allowed-Roaming-Number

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE E212_IMSI_Prefix Specifies=<value>, E214_GTT_Prefix=<value>, Active=<value>, Network_Node=<value>

PARAMETERS E212_IMSI_Prefix Required numeric prefix conforming to the E.212 ITU standard for International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) phone numbers. This prefix represents the first part of IMSI’s accepted by this switch for roaming. It can range from 5 to 10 digits in length.

E214_GTT_Prefix Required numeric prefix conforming to the E.214 ITU standard for converting International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) telephone numbers into numbers used international routing of SS7 messages. (E.214 provides a method for converting the IMSI into a number that can be used for routing to international SS7 switches.) This number is required and can range from zero to 10 digits in length.

Active The softswitch call processor requires this indicator to determine whether to process calls that have the given prefix. Set to 0 to block call processing for IMSI’s that have this prefix, or 1 to allow processing of the calls.

Network_Node Gives the network node identifier of the Home Location Register (HLR) for the given prefix. This numeric value must match a Network Node ID for a Home Location Registry (HLR) defined in the Network-Nodes section if the HLR will be used. Set this to 0 for GTT routing.

Global Title Allowed Roaming





OTHER COMMANDS


del <imsi>-<gtt>-<network>-CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE

In the above example, <imsi> is the E212_IMSI_Prefix value for the resource, <gtt> is the E214_GTT_Prefix value, and <network> is the Network_Node identifier.

You cannot modify the CFGMSIGLOBALTITLE resource from outside its context. You can only modify its “active” flag from inside the CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE resource context:

mod CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE active={0|1}

EXAMPLES Adding a CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE resource at the command line prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Mobile-Global-Title-or-Allowed-Roaming-Number>Add CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE E212_IMSI_Prefix Specifies=3101501, E214_GTT_Prefix=2149724, Active=1, Network_Node=22

Sample batch entry to add a CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd Mobile-Global-Title-or-Allowed-Roaming-Number;

ADD CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE E212_IMSI_Prefix Specifies=3101501, E214_GTT_Prefix=2149724, Active=1, Network_Node=22;

cd;

Deleting a CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Mobile-Global-Title-or-Allowed-Roaming-Number>del 3101501-2149724-22-CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE

Modifying a CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Mobile-Global-Title-or-Allowed-Roaming-Number/3101501-2149724-22-CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE>mod CFGIMSIGLOBALTITLE active=0

MSRN HON Distribution





7.12 MSRN HON Distribution

Mobile Station Roaming Numbers (MSRN) are used as temporary telephone call identifications. They are used to set up mobile phone calls and route setup messages from a Gateway Mobile Switching Center (GMSC) to the target Mobile Switching Center. They are assigned to telephone calls and are used in the setup messages for the call. After an MSRN is used for a call, it is released back into a pool of MSRNs for use in other phone calls.

The SPMPCARDCALLTYPE resource is used to set up the MSRN ranges for the home switch pools.

NAME MSRN HON Distribution

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSRN-HON-Distribution

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SPMPCARDCALLTYPE Called_Pty_Begin=<value>, Called_Pty_End=<value>, Pool_ID=<value>

PARAMETERS Called_Pty_Begin This is the starting number for the range of numbers in this pool. Values can be up to 15 digits in length.

Called_Pty_End This is the ending number for the range of numbers in this pool. Values can be up to 15 digits in length.

Pool_ID This is a pool identifier which uniquely identifies this pool of MSRN ranges.

OTHER COMMANDS

Del <beg>-<end>-SPMPCARDCALLTYPE

In the above example, <beg> is the Called_Pty_Begin value and <end> is the Called_Pty_End value for the pool. You cannot change any values in the SPMPCARDCALLTYPE resource using the mod command. To change any of the parameters, you must first delete the resource and then re-add it using new values.

MSRN HON Distribution





EXAMPLES To add an SPMPCARDCALLTYPE resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSRN-HON-Distribution>Add SPMPCARDCALLTYPE Called_Pty_Begin=2212000, Called_Pty_End=2212099, Pool_ID=22

Example of a batch file entry used to add an SPMPCARDCALLTYPE resource:

cd;cd System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd MSRN-HON-Distribution;ADD SPMPCARDCALLTYPE

Called_Pty_Begin=2212000, Called_Pty_End=2212099, Pool_ID=22;

cd;

Deleting an SPMPCARDCALLTYPE resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MSRN-HON-Distribution>Del 2212000-2212099-SPMPCARDCALLTYPE

ODB Configuration





7.13 ODB Configuration

The HPLMODBMAP resource is used to set up Operator Determined Barring (ODP).

NAME ODB Configuration

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/ODB-Config/PLMN-ODB-Mapping

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add HPLMODBMAP PLMN_ODB_ID=<value>, Service_Key=<value>

PARAMETERS PLMN_ODB_ID PLMNP ODB mapping identifier. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 DB_01 PLM_ODB_12 PLMN_ODB_23 PLMN_ODB_3

Service_Key Service key. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 ServKey_01 ServKey_12 ServKey_23 ServKey_3

OTHER COMMANDS

Del <n>-HPLMODBMAP

In the above example, <n> is the PLMN_ODB_ID. You cannot change any values in the HPLMODBMAP resource using the mod command. To change any of the parameters, you must first delete the resource and then re-add it with new values.

ODB Configuration





EXAMPLES To add an HPLMODBMAP resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/ODB-Config/PLMN-ODB-Mapping>Add HPLMODBMAP PLMN_ODB_ID=3, Service_Key=1

Example of a batch file entry used to add an HPLMODBMAP resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd ODB-Config/PLMN-ODB-Mapping;ADD HPLMODBMAP

PLMN_ODB_ID=3, Service_Key=1;

cd;

Deleting an HPLMODBMAP resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/ODB-Config/PLMN-ODB-Mapping>Del 3-HPLMODBMAP

IMSI to CCM Mapping





7.14 IMSI to CCM Mapping

This feature allows a mobile phone to be registered exclusively to a CCM for testing purposes. After creating the resource, turn off the mobile phone used for the CCM test for 20 seconds and then turn it back on. The phone is now registered to the target CCM. The target CCM is now ready to accept calls from the phone.

NAME IMSI to CCM Mapping

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/IMSI-To-CCM-Mapping

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add IMSICCMMAP IMSI=<value>, CCM=<value>

PARAMETERS IMSI This is required numeric International Mobile Subscriber identifier (IMSI) OF the mobile phone to be used in the test, up to 15 digits in length.

CCM Required identifier of a protected CCM Node which this subscriber is being moved to, up to 64 digits in length.

OTHER COMMANDS

Del <n>-IMSICCMMAP

In the above example, <n> is the IMSI.

You cannot modify an IMSICCMMAP resource.

EXAMPLES To add an IMSICCMMAP resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/IMSI-To-CCM-Mapping>Add IMSICCMMAP IMSI=3, CCM=1

Example of a batch file entry used to add an IMSICCMMAP resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd IMSI-To-CCM-Mapping;ADD HPLMODBMAP

IMSI=3, CCM=1;

cd;

Deleting an IMSICCMMAP resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/IMSI-To-CCM-Mapping>Del 9875674362-IMSICCMMAP

MAP Message IE Sets





7.15 MAP Message IE Sets

The SPMREQMAPMSGIESET resource is used to configure MAP message sets.

NAME MAP Message IE Sets

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MAP-Message-IE-Sets

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SPMREQMAPMSGIESET HLR_Number=<value>, Message_Index=<value>, IE_Index=<value>, [Default_Value=<value>]

PARAMETERS HLR_Number Required numeric Home Location Registry (HLR) identifier. The HLR identifier must match the identifier of an HLR node defined in the Network-Nodes section of the Office Parameters. (See “MSC Network Nodes.”)

Message_Index Required request-map message index. Values may range from 1 to 100.

IE_Index This is a required IE map message index that denotes the type of Send Routing Information (SRI) message:

Value Meaning

1 SRI MSISDN2 SRI Closed User Group (CUG) Interlock3 SRI CUG Outgoing Access4 SRI CUG Extension Container5 SRI Num of Forwarding6 SRI Interrogation Type7 SRI OR Interrogation8 SRI OR Capability9 SRI GMSC Address10 SRI Call Reference Number11 SRI Forwarding Reason12 SRI Basic Service Group13 SRI Network Signal Protocol ID14 SR Network Signal Info15 SRI Network Signal Extension Container 16 SRI CAMEL Info Support CAMEL Phase17 SRI Suppression of Announcement18 SRI Extension Container19 SRI Alerting Pattern20 SRI CCBS Call21 SRI Supported CCBS Phase22 SRI Additional Signal Info Protocol ID23 SRI Additional Signal Info

MAP Message IE Sets





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Value Meaning

24 SRI Additional Signal Extension Container25 SRI IST Support Indicator26 SRI Pre-Paging Supported27 SRI Call Diversion Treatment Indicator28 SRI Long FTN Supported

Default_Value Optional request-map message default value.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the SPMREQMAPMSGIESET context:

Del <n>-SPMREQMAPMSGIESET

Mod SPMREQMAPMSGIESET Message_Index=<n>, [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

In the above example, <n> is the Message_Index value. If you change to the <n>-SPMREQMAPMSGIESET context, you do not have to specify the Message_Index value:

Mod SPMREQMAPMSGIESET Message_Index=<n>, [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

EXAMPLES To add a SPMREQMAPMSGIESET resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MAP-Message-IE-Sets> Add SPMREQMAPMSGIESET HLR_Number=22, Message_Index=1, IE_Index=1

Example of a batch file entry used to add a SPMREQMAPMSGIESET resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd MAP-Message-IE-Sets;ADD SPMREQMAPMSGIESET

HLR_Number=22, Message_Index=1, IE_Index=1;

cd;

Deleting an SPMREQMAPMSGIESET resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/MAP-Message-IE-Set>Del 1-SPMREQMAPMSGIESET

CAP Message IE Sets





7.16 CAP Message IE Sets

The SPMREQCAPMSGIESET resource is used to configure CAP message sets.

NAME CAP Message IE Sets

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/CAP-Message-IE-Sets

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add SPMREQCAPMSGIESET SCP_Msg_Set=<value>, Message_Index=<value>, IE_Index=<value>

PARAMETERS SCP_Msg_Set Specify a pre-configure SCP node. Required SCP message set number.

Message_Index Required request-CAP message index. This value can range from 1 to 100.

IE_Index Required request-CAP message IE index:

Value Meaning

1 INITDP_SERVICE_KEY2 INITDP_CALLED_PARTY_NUMBER3 INITDP_CALLING_PARTY_NUMBER4 INITDP_CALLING_PARTY_CATEGORY5 INITDP_CG_ENCOUNTERED 6 INITDP_IPSSP_CAPABILITIES7 INITDP_LOCATION_NUMBER8 INITDP_ORIGINAL_CALLED_PARTY_ID9 INITDP_HIGH_LAYER_COMPATIBILITY10 INITDP_ADDITIONAL_CALLING_PARTY_NUMBER11 INITDP_BEARER_CAPABILITY12 INITDP_EVENT_TYPE_BCSM13 INITDP_REDIRECTING_PARTY_ID14 INITDP_REDIRECTION_INFORMATION 15 INITDP_CAUSE16 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_FWD_SVC_CONF_TREAT_IND17 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_FWD_SVC_CALL_DIVE_TREAT_IND18 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_FWD_SVC_CGRTY_RESTRICT_IND19 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_BKWD_SVC_CONF_TREAT_IND20 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_BKWD_SVC_CALL_COMP_TREAT_IND21 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_BOTHWAY_THRU_CONNECT_IND22 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_CONNECT_NUM_TREAT_IND23 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_NON_CUG_CALL24 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_HOLD_TREAT_IND 25 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_CW_TREAT_IND26 INITDP_SVC_INT_IND_2_ECT_TREAT_IND27 INITDP_CARRIER28 INITDP_CUG_INDEX29 INITDP_CUG_INTERLOCK30 INITDP_CUG_OUTGOING_ACCESS31 INITDP_IMSI 32 INITDP_SUBSCRIBER_STATE33 INITDP_LOC_INFO_AGE_OF_LOCATION_INFO34 INITDP_LOC_INFO_GEOGRAPHICAL_INFO35 INITDP_LOC_INFO_VLR_NUMBER36 INITDP_LOC_INFO_LOCATION_NUMBER37 INITDP_LOC_INFO_CGI_SAI_LAI

CAP Message IE Sets





PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Value Meaning

38 INITDP_LOC_INFO_EXTENSION_CONTAINER39 INITDP_LOC_INFO_LSA_ID 40 INITDP_LOC_INFO_MSC_NUMBER41 INITDP_LOC_INFO_GEODETIC_INFO42 INITDP_LOC_INFO_CURRENT_LOCATION_RETRIEVED43 INITDP_EXT_BASIC_SVC_CODE44 INITDP_CALL_REFERENCE_NUMBER45 INITDP_MSC_ADDRESS

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the SPMREQCAPMSGIESET context:

Del <n>-SPMREQCAPMSGIESET

Mod SPMREQCAPMSGIESET Message_Index=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

In the above example, <n> is the Message_Index value. If you change to the <n>-SPMREQCAPMSGIESET context, you do not have to specify the Message_Index value:


EXAMPLES To add a SPMREQCAPMSGIESET resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/CAP-Message-IE-Sets> Add SPMREQCAPMSGIESET SCP_Msg_Set=1, Message_Index=1, IE_Index=1

Example of a batch file entry used to add a SPMREQCAPMSGIESET resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd CAP-Message-IE-Sets;ADD SPMREQCAPMSGIESET

SCP_Msg_Set=1, Message_Index=1, IE_Index=1

cd;

Deleting an SPMREQCAPMSGIESET resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/CAP-Message-IE-Set>Del 1-SPMREQCAPMSGIESET

Restricted PLMN





7.17 Restricted PLMN

The RESTRICTEDPLMN resource is used to specify Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMN) that are restricted.

NAME Restricted PLMN

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Restricted-PLMN

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add RESTRICTEDPLMN Restriction_List_Id=<value>, Mobile_Country_Code=<value>, Mobile_Network_Code=<value>, Description=<value>

PARAMETERS Restriction_List_Id Index into the restricted PLMN list. This is a required value in the range 0 through 32767.

Mobile_Country_CodeRequired numeric country code for the restricted network. This value must be three digits in length.

Mobile_Network_CodeA required identification of the restricted mobile network. This value must be two or three digits in length.

Description This is a required alphanumeric description of the restriction, up to 32 characters in length.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the RESTRICTEDPLMN resource:

Del <n>-RESTRICTEDPLMN

Mod RESTRICTEDPLMN Restriction_List_Id=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

In the above example, <n> represents the Restricted_List_Id value for the resource. From inside the RESTRICTEDPLMN resource, you do not have to enter the Restricted_List_Id:

Mod {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

Restricted PLMN





EXAMPLES Example of adding the restriction interactively at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Restricted-PLMN>Add RESTRICTEDPLMN

Restriction_List_Id: 44

Mobile_Country_Code: 31

-30031:Length is short. Minimum length of field MCC is 3.

Mobile_Country_Code: 310

Mobile_Network_Code: 150

Description: offlineNo Optional Parameters for this Resource

Command Successful

Example of a batch file entry to add the RESTRICTEDPLMN resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd Restricted=PLMN;ADD RESTRICTEDPLMN

Restriction_List_Id=44,Mobile_Country_Code=310,Mobile_Network_Code=150,Description=Offline;

cd;

Deleting the RESTRICTEDPLMN resource from outside the Restricted-PLMN context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Restricted-PLMN>Del 44-RESTRICTEDPLMN

Changing the RESTRICTEDPLMN resource Description parameter from inside its context:

Mod Description=Test Description

Restricted LAC/Cell Range





7.18 Restricted LAC/Cell Range

The RESTRICTEDLACCELL resource is used to set up a restriction on a range of cells within an existing Location Area Code (LAC) or set up the restriction on all the cells in an LAC. Before you can set up the restriction, the cell range must be defined to the softswitch using the MSCCFGGSMLACCELL resource. (See “GSM LAC Cell Ranges” for more information about creating the MSCCFGGSMLACCELL resource.)

NAME Restricted LAC Cell Range

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/LAC-Restriction-Provisioning

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add RESTRICTEDLACCELL Mcc_Mnc_Id=<value>, LAC=<value>, RESTRICTION_LIST=<value>, RESTRICTED_LAC=<value>, CELLID_END=<value>, CELLID_BEGIN=<value>, Sector=<value>, Prod_Descriminator=<value>, [DESCRIPTION=<value>]

PARAMETERS Mcc_Mnc_Id This is an index into the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) mobile country code and mobile network code table. It identifies the network where the cell range you are restricting is located. This value is required and must match an Mcc_Mnc_id in an MCCMNC resource in the MSC-MCC-and-MNC section of the office parameters.

LAC Specifies the location area code (LAC) being restricted.

RESTRICTION_LIST Required user-defined restriction list identifier.

RESTRICTED_LACIndicates whether the entire LAC is restricted. This value must be 1 to indicate the entire LAC is restricted or 0 to indicate only groups of cells within it are restricted.

CELLID_END The ending cell identifier of the range of cells being restricted. Required only if RESTRICTED_LAC is 0.

CELLID_BEGIN The starting cell identifier of the range of cells being restricted. Required only if RESTRICTED_LAC is 0.

Sector Sector identifier for the cells being restricted. Required.

Prod_DescriminatorProduct descriminator of the cells being restricted. Required.

DESCRIPTION Optional description for the restriction.

Restricted LAC/Cell Range





OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the RESTRICTEDLACCELL resource:

Del <lac>-<beg>-<end>-RESTRICTEDLACCELL

In the above example, <lac> is the location area code (LAC) being restricted, <beg> represents the first cell in the range and <end> represents the last. From inside the RESTRICTEDLACCELL resource, you do not have to enter the range:


EXAMPLES Adding a RESTRICTEDLACCELL resource at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/LAC-Restriction-Provisioning>Add RESTRICTEDLACCELL Mcc_Mnc_Id=2, LAC=44, RESTRICTION_LIST=1, RESTRICTED_LAC=1, Sector=<0, Prod_Descriminator=1

Example of batch file entries to add a RESTRICTEDLACCELL resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd LAC-Restriction-Provisioning;ADD RESTRICTEDLACCELL

Mcc_Mnc_Id=2, LAC=44, RESTRICTION_LIST=1, RESTRICTED_LAC=1, Sector=0, Prod_Descriminator=1;

cd;

Deleting a RESTRICTEDLACCELL resource:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/LAC-Restriction-Provisioning>DEL 44-0-99-RESTRICTEDLACCELL

Daylight Savings Time





7.19 Daylight Savings Time

The DAYLIGHTSAVING resource is used to specify when daylight savings time starts and ends if applicable.

NAME Daylight Savings Time

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Day-Light-Saving-Time-Provisioning

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add DAYLIGHTSAVING DST_Key=<value>, Start_Month=<value>, Start_Order=<value>, Start_Day=<value>, Start_Hour=<value>, End_Month=<value>, End_Order=<value>, End_Day=<value>, End_Hour=<value>

PARAMETERS DST_Key Time zone index.

Start_Month Month that daylight savings time starts. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

1 January2 February3 March4 April5 May6 June7 July8 August9 September10 October11 November12 December

Start_Order The specified day of the month to start daylight savings time. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

1 1st day of the month2 2nd day of the month3 3rd day of the month4 4th day of the month5 Last day of the month






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Start_Day Specifies the starting day of daylight savings time. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Sunday1 Monday2 Tuesday3 Wednesday4 Thursday5 Friday6 Saturday

Start_Hour Designates the starting hour of daylight savings time. Valid values are 0-23.

End_Month Month that daylight savings time ends. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

1 January2 February3 March4 April5 May6 June7 July8 August9 September10 October11 November12 December

End_Order The specified day of the month to end daylight savings time. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

1 1st day of the month2 2nd day of the month3 3rd day of the month4 4th day of the month5 Last day of the month






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

End_Day Specifies the ending day of daylight savings time. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Sunday1 Monday2 Tuesday3 Wednesday4 Thursday5 Friday6 Saturday

End_Hour Designates the ending hour of daylight savings time. Valid values are 0-23.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the DAYLIGHTSAVING resource:

Del <n>-DAYLIGHTSAVING

Mod <n>-DAYLIGHTSAVING DST_Key=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

In the above example, <n> represents the DST_Key value for the resource. From inside this, you do not have to enter the DST_Key:


EXAMPLES Example of adding the daylight saving resource interactively at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Day-Light-Saving-Time-Provisioning>add DAYLIGHTSAVINGDST_Key:1Start_Month:1Start_Order:1Start_Day:1Start_Hour:0End_Month:2End_Order:1End_Day:1End_Hour:0No Optional Parameters for this ResourceCommand Successful






EXAMPLES (CONT.)

Example of a batch file entry to add the DAYLIGHTSAVING resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Day-Light-Saving-Time-Provisioning;ADD DAYLIGHTSAVING DST_Key=1, Start_Month=1, Start_Order=1, Start_Day=1, Start_Hour=0, End_Month=2, End_Order=1, End_Day=1, End_Hour=0;cd;

Deleting the DAYLIGHTSAVING resource from outside its context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Day-Light-Saving-Time-Provisioning>Del 1-DAYLIGHTSAVING

Modifying the DAYLIGHTSAVING resource from inside its context:

Mod End_Month=3

Time Zone Distribution





7.20 Time Zone Distribution

The TIMEZONEDIS resource is used to add time zone distribution information.

NAME Time Zone Distribution

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/TimeZone-Distribution

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add TIMEZONEDIS TimeZone_Index=<value>, Time_Zone=<value>, DST=<value>, TimeZone_Name=<value>

PARAMETERS TimeZone_Index Time zone index.

Time_Zone The offset between universal time and the local time. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

180 GMT - 13 hr179 GMT - 12 hr 45 min178 GMT - 12 hr 30 min177 GMT - 12 hr 15 min176 GMT - 12 hr175 GMT - 11 hr 45 min174 GMT - 11 hr 30 min173 GMT - 11 hr 15 min172 GMT - 11 hr171 GMT - 10 hr 45 min170 GMT - 10 hr 30 min169 GMT - 10 hr 15 min168 GMT - 10 hr167 GMT - 9 hr 45 min166 GMT - 9 hr 30 min165 GMT - 9 hr 15 min164 GMT - 9 hr163 GMT - 8 hr 45 min162 GMT - 8 hr 30 min161 GMT - 8 hr 15 min160 GMT - 8 hr159 GMT - 7 hr 45 min158 GMT - 7 hr 30 min157 GMT - 7 hr 15 min156 GMT - 7 hr155 GMT - 6 hr 45 min154 GMT - 6 hr 30 min153 GMT - 6 hr 15 min152 GMT - 6 hr151 GMT - 5 hr 45 min150 GMT - 5 hr 30 min149 GMT - 5 hr 15 min148 GMT - 5 hr147 GMT - 4 hr 45 min146 GMT - 4 hr 30 min145 GMT - 4 hr 15 min






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Value Meaning

144 GMT - 4 hr143 GMT - 3 hr 45 min142 GMT - 3 hr 30 min141 GMT - 3 hr 15 min140 GMT - 3 hr139 GMT - 2 hr 45 min138 GMT - 2 hr 30 min137 GMT - 2 hr 15 min136 GMT - 2 hr135 GMT - 1 hr 45 min134 GMT - 1 hr 30 min133 GMT - 1 hr 15 min132 GMT - 1 hr131 GMT - 45 min130 GMT - 30 min129 GMT - 15 min0 GMT1 GMT + 15 min2 GMT + 30 min3 GMT + 45 min4 GMT + 1 hr5 GMT + 1 hr 15 min6 GMT + 1 hr 30 min7 GMT + 1 hr 45 min8 GMT + 2 hr9 GMT + 2 hr 15 min10 GMT + 2 hr 30 min11 GMT + 2 hr 45 min12 GMT + 3 hr13 GMT + 3 hr 15 min14 GMT + 3 hr 30 min15 GMT + 3 hr 45 min16 GMT + 4 hr17 GMT + 4 hr 15 min18 GMT + 4 hr 30 min19 GMT + 4 hr 45 min20 GMT + 5 hr21 GMT + 5 hr 15 min22 GMT + 5 hr 30 min23 GMT + 5 hr 45 min24 GMT + 6 hr25 GMT + 6 hr 15 min26 GMT + 6 hr 30 min27 GMT + 6 hr 45 min28 GMT + 7 hr29 GMT + 7 hr 15 min30 GMT + 7 hr 30 min31 GMT + 7 hr 45 min32 GMT + 8 hr33 GMT + 8 hr 15 min34 GMT + 8 hr 30 min35 GMT + 8 hr 45 min






PARAMETERS(CONT.)

Value Meaning

36 GMT + 9 hr37 GMT + 9 hr 15 min38 GMT + 9 hr 30 min39 GMT + 9 hr 45 min40 GMT + 10 hr41 GMT + 10 hr 15 min42 GMT + 10 hr 30 min43 GMT + 10 hr 45 min44 GMT + 11 hr45 GMT + 11 hr 15 min46 GMT + 11 hr 30 min47 GMT + 11 hr 45 min48 GMT + 12 hr49 GMT + 12 hr 15 min50 GMT + 12 hr 30 min51 GMT + 12 hr 45 min52 GMT + 13 hr

DST Daylight savings time adjustment (in hours). Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No Adjustment1 1 hrs Adjust2 2 hrs Adjust

TimeZone_Name Description of the time zone.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the TIMEZONEDIS resource:

Del <n>-TIMEZONEDIS

Mod TIMEZONEDIS TimeZone_Index=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

In the above example, <n> represents the TimeZone_Index value for the resource. From inside the TIMEZONEDIS resource, you do not have to enter the TimeZone_Index:







EXAMPLES Example of adding the time zone distribution resource interactively at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/TimeZone-Distribution>add TIMEZONEDISTimeZone_Index:1Time_Zone:1DST:1TimeZone_Name:lab1No Optional Parameters for this ResourceCommand Successful

Example of a batch file entry to add the TIMEZONEDIS resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/TimeZone-Distribution;ADD TIMEZONEDIS TimeZone_Index=1, Time_Zone=1, DST=1, TimeZone_Name=lab1;cd;

Deleting the TIMEZONEDIS resource from outside its context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/TimeZone-Distribution>Del 1-TIMEZONEDIS

Modifying the TIMEZONEDIS resource from inside its context:

Mod TimeZone_Name=lab2

Home Public Land Mobile Network (HPLMN) Codes





7.21 Home Public Land Mobile Network (HPLMN) Codes

The HPLMNETWORKCODE resource is used to specify the HPLMN network codes.

NAME HPLMN Network Codes

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/HPLMN-Network-Codes

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add HPLMNETWORKCODE MCC=<value>, MNC=<value>, Description=<value>

PARAMETERS MCC Mobile Country Code. Three digit number that uniquely identifies a given country. Default: Not Defined.

MNC Mobile Network Code. Two or three digit number that uniquely identifies a given network from within a specified country (MCC). Default: Not Defined.

Description Optional description for the network code resource.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the HPLMNETWORKCODE resource:

Del <n>-<n>-HPLMNETWORKCODE

Mod HPLMNETWORKCODE MCC=<n>, MNC=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

In the above example, <n> represents the MCC and MNC values respectively for this resource. From inside this resource, you do not have to enter the MCC and MNC values:


Home Public Land Mobile Network (HPLMN) Codes





EXAMPLES Example of adding the HPLMN network codes interactively at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/HPLMN-Network-Codes>add HPLMNETWORKCODEMCC:100MNC:200Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : yDescription (Default:Not Defined) :lab1Command Successful

Example of a batch file entry to add the HPLMNETWORKCODE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/HPLMN-Network-Codes;ADD HPLMNETWORKCODE MCC=100, MNC=200, Description=lab1;cd;

Deleting the HPLMNETWORKCODE resource from outside its context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/HPLMN-Network-Codes>Del 100-200-HPLMNETWORKCODE

Modifying the DAYLIGHTSAVING resource from inside its context:

Mod Description=lab1

International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) Checking





7.22 International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) Checking

The IMEICHECK resource is used to specify IMEI checking values.

NAME IMEI Checking

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/IMEI-Checking

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add IMEICHECK Service=<value>, Black_Listed=<value>, Gray_Listed=<value>, Unknown_Equip_In_Eir=<value>, Map_User_Err=<value>, Map_Provider_Err=<value>, Activation=<value>

PARAMETERS Service Specifies service identification. Required. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 General1 Attach2 Inter-VLR Loc Update3 Intra-VLR Loc Update4 Periodic Loc Update5 Mobile CC Orig6 Mobile CC Term7 Mobile SMS Orig8 Mobile SMS Term9 Mobile CISS Orig10 Mobile CISS Term11 Mobile LCS Orig12 Mobile LCS Term13 Provide Subs Info

Black_Listed Specifies weather the service is granted or if it is on a black list. Optional. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Service Granted1 Illegal Equipment

Gray_Listed Specifies weather the service is granted or if it is on a gray list. Optional. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Service Granted1 Illegal Equipment






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Unknown_Equip_In_EiSpecifies unknown equipment in Equipment Identity Register (EIR). Optional. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Service Granted1 Illegal Equipment2 Network Failure

Map_User_Err Specifies map user error. Optional. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Service Granted2 Network Failure

Map_Provider_Er Specifies map provider error. Optional. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Service Granted2 Network Failure

Activation Enables IMEI checking. Optional. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Disable1 Enable

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the IMEICHECK resource:

Del <n>-IMEICHECK

Mod IMEICHECK Service=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

In the above example, <n> represents the Service value for the resource. From inside this resource, you do not have to enter the Service value:







EXA MPLES Example of adding the IMEI Checking resource interactively at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/IMEI-Checking>add IMEICHECKService:1Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : yBlack_Listed (Default:1) :1Gray_Listed (Default:0) :0Unknown_Equip_In_Eir (Default:1) :1Map_User_Err (Default:2) :2Map_Provider_Err (Default:2) :2Activation (Default:0) :0Command Successful

Example of a batch file entry to add the IMEICHECK resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/IMEI-Checking;ADD IMEICHECK Service=1, Black_Listed=1, Gray_Listed=0, Unknown_Equip_In_Eir=1, Map_User_Err=2, Map_Provider_Err=2, Activation=0;cd;

Deleting the IMEICHECK resource from outside its context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/IMEI-Checking>Del 1-IMEICHECK

Modifying the IMEICHECK resource from inside its context:

Mod Black_Listed=0

GSM Trace





7.23 GSM Trace

The GSMTRACE resource is used to specify the values for a GSM trace.

NAME GSM Trace

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/GSM-Trace

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add GSMTRACE Identity_Type=<value>, Invoking_Event=<value>, BSS_Record_Type=<value>, OMC_Identity=<value>, Start_Time=<value>, Stop_Time=<value>, Delete_Time=<value>

PARAMETERS Mobile_Identity Specifies the mobile identity. 1-16 alphanumeric characters.

Identity_Type Specifies the identity type. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 MSI1 IMEI2 IMEISV

Invoking_Event Specifies the invoking event. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 All1 MO & MT2 LU

BSS_Record_Type Specifies the BSS record type. Valid values are as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Basic1 Handover2 Radio

OMC_Identity Specify the OMC identity. 1-20 alphanumeric characters. Default: Not Defined.

Start_Time Specifies the start time. Format is: yyyy/-MM/-dd/ HH/:mm/:ss.

Stop_Time Specifies the stop time. Format is: yyyy/-MM/-dd/ HH/:mm/:ss.

Delete_Time Specifies the delete time. Format is: yyyy/-MM/-dd/ HH/:mm/:ss.

GSM Trace





OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the GSMTRACE resource:

Del <n>-<n>-GSMTRACE

Mod GSMTRACE Mobile_Identity=<n>, Identity_Type=<n>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

In the above example, <n> represents the Mobile_Identity and Identity_Type values for the resource. From inside the <n>-GSMTRACE resource, you do not have to enter these values.


EXAMPLES Example of adding the daylight saving resource interactively at the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/GSM-Trace>add GSMTRACEMobile_Identity:0Identity_Type:0Invoking_Event:0BSS_Record_Type:0OMC_Identity:0Start_Time:2005-01-01 01:00:00Stop_Time:2005-12-01 01:00:00Delete_Time:2005-12-02 01:00:00No Optional Parameters for this ResourceCommand Successful

Example of a batch file entry to add the GSMTRACE resource:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/GSM-Trace;ADD GSMTRACE Mobile_Identity=0, Identity_Type=0, Invoking_Event=0, BSS_Record_Type=0, OMC_Identity=0, Start_Time=2005-01-01 01:00:00, Stop_Time=2005-12-01 01:00:00, Delete_Time=2005-12-02 01:00:00;cd;

Deleting the GSMTRACE resource from outside the GSMTRACE context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/GSM-Trace>Del 0-0-GSMTRACE

Modifying the GSMTRACE resource from inside its context:

Mod BSS_Record_Type=0

GSM Trace







Alcatel Provisioning CALEA


SECTION 8 PROVISIONING CALEA

This section of the CLI Guide explains how to provision the Atrium softswitch to meet the requirements of the Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA). These requirements allow law enforcement access to subscriber calls.

8.1 Overview of CALEA Support

To set up the softswitch to allow law enforcement to monitor a subscriber, you must first configure a connection for law enforcement. This is accomplished by adding a LEATCPCONNECTION resource for each connection you want to make between the softswitch and a law enforcement agency.

Next, you must set up cases. A case is a softswitch resource that allows law enforcement agencies to monitor a particular subscriber’s phone calls for a particular duration of time. Cases are stored as LASECASE resources for each law enforcement agency. For each agency you can set up multiple cases. The cases can be modified and removed as necessary to meet legal requirements.

8.1.1 Configuring the TCP Connection for Law EnforcementA prerequisite to provisioning the softswitch for CALEA is to configure a TCP connection. This provides a communications link between the switch and the law enforcement agency.

Configuration of the TCP connection is accomplished by adding a LEATCPCONNECTION resource to the system for each law agency.

8.1.2 Locking and Unlocking ResourcesCertain resources must be locked before they can be changed. Locking a resource takes it out-of-service. After it is changed, it must be unlocked so it can go back into service with its new configuration. The LEATCPCONNECTION and LASECASE resources are two that must be locked before they can be modified. By default, these resources are locked upon creation. You must unlock them to put them into service.

If you want to modify a LEATCPCONNECTION or LASECASE resource, you must first lock it. After making changes you must unlock it to put it back into service.

Overview of CALEA Support



Provisioning CALEA Alcatel


8.1.3 Using the Query Command to See if a Resource is LockedYou cannot delete, nor perform maintenance upon, a LEATCPCONNECTION or LASECASE resource unless it is locked. It is important, then, to know whether these resources are locked or unlocked before you attempt to delete or modify them. You can find out whether a resource is locked by using the query command. Below is an example of using the query command to determine the lock status of an LEATCPCONNECTION resource:

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>query 2-LEATCPCONNECTIONLEATCPCONNECTION:-Properties:Msc_Node_Id [Msc Node Id].......1Connection_Id [Connection Id].......2IP [IP].......192.168.7.7Port [Port].......51State:adminState [Admin State].......leaTcpConnectionAdminState_locked -> 1Command Successful

8.1.4 Unlocking a ResourceNote that in the above example the Admin State is 1. This means the resource is locked. Issuing the following command changes the state to unlocked, which has a value of 2:

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>cd 2-LEATCPCONNECDTIONSystem/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode/2-LEATCPCONNECDTION>unlockCommand SuccessfulSystem/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode/2-LEATCPCONNECDTION>queryLEATCPCONNECTION:-Properties:Msc_Node_Id [Msc Node Id].......1Connection_Id [Connection Id].......2IP [IP].......192.168.7.7Port [Port].......51State:adminState [Admin State].......leaTcpConnectionAdminState_unlocked ->2 Command Successful

8.1.5 ProtectionWhen the LEATCPCONNECTION resource is provisioned, it establishes two TCP connections to a Law Enforcement Agency (LEA) server. One of these connections is from the Atrium System Administration Module (SAM) and the other is from its backup module (protecting module). These connections share the same traffic simultaneously. If one of the connections fails, all traffic is handled immediately by the other connection.

If one TCP connection resource is locked, both connections become inactive at the same time.

If the LEA server goes down, both connections become inactive and traffic is queued until the LEA server comes back, at which time the connections become active (provided there are pending messages).

Configuring the Connection to the LEA Server





8.2 Configuring the Connection to the LEA Server

As mentioned earlier, you must set up a TCP connection the LEA Server before you can add cases to the system. The connection is maintained in the LEATCPCONNECTION resource. If a LEATCPCONNECTION does not already exist, you must add one to implement CALEA support.

NAME LEA TCP Connection Resource

CONTEXT System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/<n>-mscnode

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add LEATCPCONNECTION Msc_Node_Id=<value>, Connection_Id=<value>, Port=<value>, IP=<value>

PARAMETERS Msc_Node_Id Required logical identifier of the SAM card, where the TCP connection will be added.

Connection_Id This is a required number in the range 1 through 255 that identifies the TCP connection in this SAM card that will be used by the CALEA case provisioning port.

Port Required port number of the far end law enforcement agency system for the TCP connection. Can range form 1 through 65535. Together with the IP address, this identifies the far end connection.

IP This is the TCP/IP address of the far end law enforcement agency system for the TCP connection, in the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where nnn is a number that can range from 0 through 255. Together with the Port number, this identifies the far end connection.

OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-LEATCPCONNECTION

Mod LEATCPCONNECTION Msc_Node_Id=<value>, Connection_Id=<value>, [Port=<value>,] [IP=<value>]

In the above example, n is the logical connection_id which is used for deletes and is part of the LEATCPCONNECTION resource name.

From inside the resource context you can only change the remote (far-end) Port and IP values:

Mod [Port=<value>,] [IP=<value>]

Configuring the Connection to the LEA Server





EXAMPLES Adding a law enforcement agency TCP connection from the <n>-mscnode context (where the SAM card is 1-mscnode):

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>add LEATCPCONNECTION msc_node_id=1, connection_id=1, port=50, ip=192.168.5.5

Batch file example to add a LEATCPCONNECTION resource:

cd;cd nodes/wireless-soft-switch/wss-cards/1-mscnode;add LEATCPCONNECTION

msc_node_id=1, connection_id=1, port=50, ip=192.168.5.5;

cd;

Deleting an LEATCPCONNECTION that has a connection_id value of 2:

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>2-LEATCPCONNECTION>lockCommand Successful

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>del 2-LEATCPCONNECTION


Modifying an LEATCPCONNECTION to change the port number to 51:

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>2-LEATCPCONNECTION>lockCommand Successful

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>2-LEATCPCONNECTION>mod port=51Command Successful

System/Nodes/Wireless-Soft-Switch/Wss-Cards/1-mscnode>2-LEATCPCONNECTION>unlockCommand Successful

Setting up CALEA Cases





8.3 Setting up CALEA Cases

A LASECASE resource must be set up for each subscriber targeted for surveillance by the law enforcement agency.

NAME LASECASE Resource

CONTEXT System/Subscriber-Options/Wireless-CALEA

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

Add LASECASE Case_Name=<value>, Case_ID=<value>, AcctMgmnt_ID=<value>, ID_Type=<value>, ID=<value>, Start_Date_Time=<value>, End_Date_Time=<value>, Name=<value>, Connection_Break=<value>, Connection=<value>, Conf_Party_Change=<value>, CDC_Protocol=<value>, Connection_Id=<value>, Agency_DN1=<value>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . }

PARAMETERS Case_Name Unique identifier up to 35 characters in length. The name you enter becomes part of the resource name. The name will be <n>-LASECASE, where <n> is the Case_Name.

Agency Required user-defined name for the agency making the surveillance, up to 30 characters in length.

Case_ID A required Lawfully Authorized Electronic Surveillance (LAES) case identity, up to 25 characters in length.

Acct__Mgmnt_ID An Accounting Management Id for the Call Content Channel (CCC) source, up to 15 characters in length.

ID_Type This is required to indicate the kind of ID used to uniquely identify the subscriber. Options are 1 for MSISDN or 2 if you are using the subscriber’s IMS.

ID Enter a required identifier for the subscriber. It must be of the type specified under ID_Type. It can be up to 16 digits in length and must be all numerals. (Note: This value is encrypted in the database for security purposes.)

Start_Date_Time This is a required value to specify the starting date and time for the surveillance to begin, in the format yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss. The Start_Date_Time must be less than the End_Date_Time or an error will occur. (Example: 2005-11-02 09:30:00)

End_Date_Time This is a required value to specify the starting date and time for the surveillance to begin, in the format yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss. The End_Date_Time must be greater than the Start_Date_Time or an error will occur. In batch file, this value must be supplied in quotes. (Example: 2006-02-09 14:30:00)

Name Required name up to 29 characters in length to provide a text description for the Lawfully Authorized Electronic Surveillance (LAES) Profile.






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Connection_Break Required value that specifies whether the Connection Break CDC message is to be sent to the Law Enforcement agent. This parameter is mutual exclusive with Conference Party parameter, meaning that if this parameter is set to Y, the Conf_Party_Change must be set to N.)

Connection Required value that specifies whether Connection CDC message is to be sent to the Law Enforcement agent. This parameter is mutually exclusive with Conference Party parameters, meaning that if this parameter is set to Y, the Conf_Party_Change must be set to N.)

Conf_Party_ChangeRequired value that specifies whether a Conference Party Change CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. This parameter is mutual exclusive with Connection and Connection Break parameters. That is to say, if this parameter is set to Y, the Connection_Break must be set to N. Valid values for the Conf_Party_Change are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is Y (Yes).

CDC_Protocol This is a required value that must be set to 1 to indicate that TCP/IP is the protocol over this connection used for communications with the law enforcement agent server.

Connection_Id This is a required identifier to identify the connection to the law enforcement agency. It must match the Connection_Id value in one of the connections established by a LEATCPCONNECTION resource. (See the instructions for creating the LEATCPCONNECTION connection resources found earlier in this section of the manual.)

Incld_Loc_in_CDC_MsgOptional parameter that determines whether location information will be included in the CDC messages.

GMSC_Basic_Call_MontrOptional value that indicates whether to monitor GMSC Roaming Numbers. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 0 (No).

Agency_DN1-5 These parameters are the directory numbers of the surveillance agents. Each is from 0 to 30 digits. The first one, Agency_DN1, is required when the IAP_Options has any value other than “No Deliver.” The remaining Agency_DNs are always optional. Duplicate agency directory numbers are allowed in these five fields.






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

IAP_Option This is an optional value to denote to the call content. If this value is set to 1 or 2, then the Agency_DN1 field is required. Values are:

Value Meaning

0 No deliver (default)1 Deliver subject content2 Deliver all content

Subject_Signal Optional value that specifies whether the Subject Signal CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Network_Signal Optional value that specifies whether the Network Signal CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Term__Attempt Optional value that specifies whether the Termination Attempt CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Serving_System Optional value that specifies whether the Serving System CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Release Optional value that specifies whether the Release CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Redirection Optional value that specifies whether the Redirection CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Packet_Envelope Optional value that specifies whether the Packet Envelope CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 0 (No).

Origination Optional value that specifies whether the Origination CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Change Optional value that specifies whether the Change CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

CC_Open Optional value that specifies whether the CC Open CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

CC_Close Optional value that specifies whether the CC Close CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Answer Optional value that specifies whether the Answer CDC message is to be sent to the law enforcement agency server. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Bearer_Capability Optional value that specifies whether the Bearer Capability is to be sent in the Answer message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Location Optional value that specifies whether the location is to be sent in the Answer message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Answer_Party_Id Optional value that specifies whether the Answering Party ID is to be sent in the Answer message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Ans_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Answer message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Close_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Close message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Open_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Open message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Change_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Change message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Change_Param_CCCIdOptional value that specifies whether the CCC ID is to be sent in the Change message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Orig_Param_Bearer_CapabilityOptional value that specifies whether the Bearer Capability is to be sent in the Origination message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Orig_Param_Trans__Carrier_IdOptional value that specifies whether the Transit Carrier ID is to be sent in the Origination message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Orig_Param_LocationOptional value that specifies whether the location is to be sent in the Origination message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Called_Id Optional value that specifies whether the Called Party ID is to be sent in the Origination message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Calling_Id Optional value that specifies whether the Calling Party ID is to be sent in the Origination message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Orig_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Origination message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Pkt_Envlp_LocationOptional value that specifies whether the location is to be sent in the Packet Envelope message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Pkt_Envlp_Call_Id Optional value that specifies whether the Call ID is to be sent in the Packet Envelope message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Pkt_Envlp_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Packet Envelope message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Intercept_GSM_SMSOptional value that specifies whether the Intercepted GSM SMS Packet is to be sent in the Packet Envelope message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Redirect_Param_Bearer_CapabilityOptional value that specifies whether the Bearer Capability is to be sent in the Redirection message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Trans_Carrier_Id Optional value that specifies whether the Transit Carrier ID is to be sent in redirection messages. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Redirect_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in redirection messages. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Rel_Param_LocationOptional value that specifies whether the location is to be sent in the Release message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Rel_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Release message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

System_ID Optional value that specifies whether the System ID is to be sent in the Serving System message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

SerSys_Param_IAP_System_ID Optional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Serving System message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Redirected_From_InfoOptional value that specifies whether the Redirected From Info is to be sent in the Termination Attempt message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Attemp_Param_Bearer_CapabilityOptional value that specifies whether the Bearer Capability is to be sent in the Termination Attempt message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Called_Party_Id Optional value that specifies whether the Called Party ID is to be sent in the Termination Attempt message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Attemp_Param_IAP_System_IdOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Termination Attempt message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Communicating Optional value that specifies whether the Communicating Indicator is to be sent in the Conference Party Change message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Dropped Optional value that specifies whether the Dropped Indicator is to be sent in the Conference Party Change message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Removed Optional value that specifies whether the Removed Indicator is to be sent in the Conference Party Change message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Joined Optional value that specifies whether the Joined Indicator is to be sent in the Conference Party Change message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

ConfPtyChg_IAP_System_ID Optional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Conference Party Change message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Connected_PartiesOptional value that specifies whether the Connected Parties indicator is to be sent in the Connection message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

New_Parties Optional value that specifies whether the New Parties Indicator is to be sent in the Connection message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Conn_Param_IAP_System_IDOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Connection message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Removed_Parties Optional value that specifies whether the Removed Parties Indicator is to be sent in the Connection Break message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Remaining_PartiesOptional value that specifies whether the Remaining Parties Indicator is to be sent in the Connection Break message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Dropped_Parties Optional value that specifies whether the Dropped Parties Indicator is to be sent in the Connection Break message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

ConnBrk_Param_IAP_System_ID0Optional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Connection Break message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).






PARAMETERS (CONT.)

Dialed_Dig_IAP_System_IDOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Dialed Digit Extraction message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Nw_Signal_Param_Call_IDOptional value that specifies whether the Call ID is to be sent in the Network Signal message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Alerting_Signal Optional value that specifies whether the Alerting Signal is to be sent in the Network Signal message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Subject_Audible_SignalOptional value that specifies whether the Subject Audible Signal is to be sent in the Network Signal message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Terminal_Display_InfoOptional value that specifies whether the Terminal Display Info is to be sent in the Network Signal message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Other Optional value that specifies whether the Other info is to be sent in the Network Signal message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Nw_Signal_Param_IAP_System_IDOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Network Signal message.

SubSig_Param_Call_ID Optional value that specifies whether the Call ID is to be sent in the Subject Signal message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

SubSig_Param_IAP_System_IDOptional value that specifies whether the IAP System ID is to be sent in the Subject Signal message. Values are Y, y or 1 to indicate Yes; N, n or 0 to indicate No. The default is 1 (Yes).

Dialed_Digit_ExtractOptional value that specifies whether Dialed Digit Extraction CDC message is to be sent to the Law Enforcement agent.






OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-LASECASE

Mod LASECASE Case_Name=<value>, {parameter1=<value1>, paremeter2=<value2>, . . . }

In the above examples, <n> is the Case_Name assigned to the LASECASE resource. From inside the resource context, a mod can be performed:

Mod {parameter1=<value1>, paremeter2=<value2>, . . . }

Except for the Case_Name, ID, Start_Date_Time and End_Date_Time parameters, the user can alter any parameter using mod. The others can only be changed by deleting the case and creating a new one.

EXAMPLES (CONT.)

Adding a LASECASE resource interactively using the command line:

System/Subscriber-Options/Wireless-CALEA>add lasecase

Case_Name: 040BX90zAgency: South Cliff Police DepartmentCase_Id: SCPD002005116DAcct__mgmt_Id: SmithID_Type: 1 ID: 9724711817Start_Date_Time: 2006-11-02 14:00:00End_Date_Time: 2006-11-15 09:30:00Name: Test NameConnection_Id: 2 Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : N

Command Successful






EXAMPLES Example of batch entry to add LASECASE, showing several optional parameter specifications:

cd;cd Subscriber-Options/Wireless-CALEA;add LASECASE

Case_Name=040BX90z,Agency=South Cliff Police Department,Case_Id=SCPD002005116D,Acct__mgmt_Id=Smith,ID_Type=1,ID=9724711817,Start_Date_Time=2006-11-02 14:00:00,End_Date_Time=2006-11-15 09:30:00,Name=Test Name,Connection_Id=2,Communicating=N, Removed=N,ConfPtyChg_IAP_System_ID;

cd;

Modifying a LASECASE resource:

System/Subscriber-Options/Wireless-CALEA/LASECASE/040BX90z-LASECASE>mod Case_ID=SCPD0020061102D

Command Successful

Deleting a LASECASE resource:

System/Subscriber-Options/Wireless-CALEA/LASECASE> DEL 040BX90z-LASECASE

Command Successful



Alcatel CLI Provisioning for E911


SECTION 9 CLI PROVISIONING FOR E911

Two resources are required to configure the softswitch for E911 support. The EMERGENCYZONE resources are required for routing emergency calls to the proper public service access point. For each cell you must also provide information that will be used to establish the cell and mobile user location. This data is maintained in EMERGENCYCALL resources.This section explains how to create and maintain the EMERGENCYZONE and EMERGENCYCALL resources for E911 processing.

9.1 Emergency Zone

The EMERGENCYZONE resource provides routing information that the softswitch uses to route calls to the proper emergency responders. It also provides the softswitch with information about how to process the call.

NAME Emergency Zone

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Emergency-Service-Zone-Provisioning

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add EMERGENCYZONE Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID=<value>, Emer_Srvc_Zone_Name=<value>, PSAP_Zone_DN_Type=<value>, [parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . . ]

PARAMETERS Emer_Srvc_Zone_IDRequired number to assign to the emergency zone as an identifier. Defaults to 1.

Emer_Srvc_Zone_NameRequired alphanumeric emergency service zone name.

PSAP_Zone_DN_TypeRequired value to indicate whether to use the Public Safety Access Point (PSAP) directory number to process the call:

Type Meaning

0 Play announcement

1 Do not use Public Safety Access Point (PSAP) Directory Number (DN)

2 Use PSAP Directory Number (DN)

PSAP_Zone_DN If you select 2 as the PSAP_Zone_DN_Type, you must provide the directory number for the Public Safety Access Point (PSAP). You can enter up to ten digits to provide the directory number here.

Emergency Zone



CLI Provisioning for E911 Alcatel


PARAMETERS(CONT.)

GMLC_Address Optional Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC) for the service zone being defined, identifyijng the gateway to the PSAP. This can be up to 15 digits in length. Defaults to 1.

Begin_ESRK_Pool_nYou can enter up to three Emergency Service Routing Key (ESRK) ranges for this emergency zone, where n represents a value from 1 through 3 to identify each. These keys can be up to ten digits in length, but must be the same length as their corresponding End_ESRK_Pool_n values. In addition, the Begin_ESRK_Pool_n value must be less than or equal to its corresponding ending ESRK value. Defaults to 1.

End_ESRK_Pool_n This is the ending value for a range of emergency service routing keys, where n matches its corresponding starting specification identifier for this zone (Begin_ESRK_Pool_n). The key can be up to ten digits in length, but it must be the same length as its corresponding Begin_ESRK_Pool_n value. In addition, the End_ESRK_Pool_n value must be greater than or equal to its corresponding beginning ESRK value. Defaults to 1.

Loc_Service_OptionOptional value that specifies the location service options:

Value Meaning

0 None (default)1 Enable PLR2 Enable PLR, Send INIT-DP3 Disable PLR, Send INIT-DP4 Disable PLR send SLR5 Enable PLR XY Routing

Routing_Option Optional value that indicates the emergency call routing method used to route the call to the public safety point for this zone, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Use the PSAP directory number.1 Use the Emergency Service Routing Digit (ESRD).2 Use the ESRK pool numbers.3 Use the INAP Service Control Point (SCP).

SCP_Address This is the service address for the E911 service, up to 15 digits in length used for Intelligent Network Application Protocol (INAP) SPC processing. This optional value can be up to 15 digits in length.

SCP_INAP_SSN This optional value is the INAP Subsystem Number (SSN) for the E911 service. Can range from 0 to 255. Default is 0.

Emergency Zone





OTHER COMMANDS


Del <n>-EMERGENCYZONE

Mod EMERGENCYZONE Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID=<value>, {parameter1=<value1>, parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

In the above example, <n> is the Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID value for the resource. From inside the resource context you don’t have to give the Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID, as follows:


EXAMPLES Adding an EMERGENCYZONE resource at the command line:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Emergency-Service-Zone-Provisioning>add EMERGENCYZONE Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID=1, Emer_Srvc_Zone_Name=East Region Emergency Center, PSAP_Zone_DN_Type=2, PSAP_Zone_DN=2185661817

Command Successful

Batch file content:

cd;cd Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters;cd Emergency-Service-Zone-Provisioning;

add EMERGENCYZONE Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID=1, Emer_Srvc_Zone_Name=East Region Emergency Center,PSAP_Zone_DN_Type=1, Begin_ESRK_Pool_1=2185661800,End_ESRK_Pool_1=2185661899,Routing_Option= 2;

cd;

Deleting the EMERGENCYZONE resource from the command prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Emergency-Service-Zone-Provisioning>Del 1-EMERGENCYZONE

Emergency Zone





EXAMPLES (CONT.)

Modifying the EMERGENCYZONE resource from the command prompt while outside the resource context:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Emergency-Service-Zone-Provisioning>Mod EMERGENCYZONE Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID=1, PSAP_Zone_DN_Type=2, PSAP_Zone_DN=2185661817

Command Successful


System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/Emergency-Service-Zone-Provisioning/1-EMERGENCYZONE>MOD PSAP_Zone_DN_Type=2, PSAP_Zone_DN=2185661817

Command Successful

Emergency Call





9.2 Emergency Call

The EMERGENCYCALL resource supplies the softswitch with information about how to handle emergency calls for a set of cells in a network.

NAME Emergency Call

CONTEXT System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/LAC-or-CELL-Emergency-Call-Provisioning

ADD COMMAND SYNTAX

add EMERGENCYCALL MCC_MNC_ID=<value>, Location_Area_Code=<value>, Cell_ID_Begin=<value>, Cell_ID_End=<value2>, E911_Solution_Type=<value>, ESRK_Assn_Method=<value>, [ESRD=<value>,] [Location_Delivery_Method=<value>]

Emergency Call





MCC_MNC_ID This is a combination of the Mobile Country Code (MCC) plus the Mobile Network Code (MNC) that identifies the country and service provider network for the cells. Valid values are UNKW (Unknown) or any user-defined MCC/MNC. The UNKW provides for the ability to enable access to a specific E911 entry when an unknown CGI is received. An unknown CGI occurs when a CGI is not configured in the system. When the “Unknown CGI” option is selected, you must also specify a corresponding emergency service zone to use for all calls received with an unknown CGI. This parameter is required.

Location_Area_CodeThis is a required parameter that specifies the Location Area Code (LAC) for the emergency call. The options are based on pre-defined location area codes. A Location Area Code must have been defined in “GSM LAC or CELL”. Minimum value allowed is 0, with the maximum value of Not Defined. Default: Not Defined.

Cell_ID_Begin For the group of cells within the MCC_MNC that these E911 parameters affect, this is the starting cell number of the range. It is a required numeric value from 1 through 65535.

Cell_ID_End For the group of cells within the MCC_MNC that these E911 parameters affect, this is the ending cell number of the range. It is a required numeric value from 1 through 65535.

E911_Solution_TypeThis required value indicates the implementation of E911 support that is used by the network. It is used by the softswitch to determine how to process emergency calls for this cell group: Valid values are:

Value Meaning

0 Phase 0 implementation, which provides onlythe capability to make a 911 call and provides at most the caller’s return phone number as location data.

1 Phase 1 implementation, which provides Phase0 data plus identifies the cell location where the call originates.

2 Phase 2 implementation, which pinpoints thecaller's location.

Emergency Call





PARAMETERS ESRK_Assn_MethodRequired indicator that tells whether an Emergency Services Routing Key (ESRK) assignment method is used or what ESRK method is used to process the E911 call, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 No ESRK (Applies to Phase 2 E911 Type)1 MPC ISUP query (Applies to both Phase 1 & Phase

2 E911 Type)2 WSS ESRK (Applies to both Phase 1 & Phase 2

E911 Type)3 GMLC query (Applies to Phase 2 E911 Type)4 MSC ESRD (Applies to Phase 2 E911 Type)5 SCP INAP ESRK (Applies to both Phase 1 & Phase

2 E911 Type)

ESRD Optional Emergency Service Routing Digits (ESRD), up to 10 digits in length. Identifies the cell site and sector of the call origination.

Emer_Srvc_Zone_IDThis is an optional parameter that specifies the identifier for the emergency service zone. This is an index whose function is to group multiple emergency call service parameters. Available options are based on pre-defined Emergency Service Zone IDs. An “Emer Srve Zone ID” must have been provisioned in “Emergency Service Zone Provisioning”.

Location_Delivery_Method Optional value to indicate how locations are determined and delivered to the PSAP, as follows:

Value Meaning

0 Hybrid 2 CAS2 NCAS 3 None4 NCAS with delay.

OTHER COMMANDS

From outside the EMERGENCYCALL context:

Del <n>-<n>-<n>-<n>-EMERGENCYCALL

Mod MCC_MNC_ID=<value>, Location_Area_Code=<value>, Cell_ID_Begin=<value>, Cell_ID_End=<value2>, {parameter1=<value1>,parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

From inside the EMERGENCYCALL context:

Mod {parameter1=<value1>,parameter2=<value2>, . . .}

Emergency Call





EXAMPLES Entering the EMERGENCY call parameters interactively at the CLI prompt:

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/LAC-or-CELL-Emergency-Call-Provisioning>add emergencycall

Mcc_Mnc_Id: 31002Cell_Id_End: 999Cell_Id_Begin: 900Mcc_Mnc_Id=>Location_Area_Code: 433E911_Solution_Type: 2ESRK_Assn_Method: 2

Prompt for Optional? (y/yes/n/no) : Y

Esrd (Default:Not Defined): 2143212222Emer_Srvc_Zone_ID:1Location_Delivery_Method (Default:0): 2

Command Not Completed :add emergencycall^-99999:Errors in Application Program.

System/Office-Parameters/Mobility-Config-Parameters/LAC-or-CELL-Emergency-Call-Provisioning>



Alcatel CLI Errors


SECTION 10 CLI ERRORS

Some errors that may occur during Command Line Interface operations are described below.

-30000 PARAMETER_NEEDED

Parameter is needed for this operation.

-30001 COMMAND_MISSING

Command name is missing. Please enter the command name.

-30002 EXTRA_PARAM

Extra parameter given.

-30003 IO_MISSING

Terminal IO is missing.

-30004 NO_PRIVILEGE

User does not have privilege for <variable> operation.

-30005 CONTEXT_MISSING

Context name is missing.""MSG""N/A""Context name is missing."

-30006 INVALID_OPERATION

Invalid operation $operation under this context.

-30007 INVALID_CONTEXT

Invalid context $context.

-30008 MISSING_PARAM

Mandatory parameter $param is missing



CLI Errors Alcatel


-30009 INVALID_SESSIONID

Invalid session id $sessionId.

-30010 ERROR_INSCHEMA

Error in Field schema of $field.

-30012 INVALID_VALUE

Invalid value for $field.

-30013 INVALID_PARAM

Invalid parameter $field.

-30014 NO_PARAMS_FOUND

No parameters found for this operation.

-30015 NO_SCHEMA_FOUND

No schema found for this MO/field.

-30016 INVALID_COMMANDNAME

nvalid command $command.

-30017 INVALID_SYNTAX

Invalid syntax for the command.

-30018 INVALID_VALUE_PARAM

Invalid syntax for the command.$string.



Alcatel CLI Errors


-30019 STOPTEST

Existing test in progress.

-30020 EXEC_HANDLER

Failure in executing command handler.

-30023 INVALID_DATEFORMAT

Invalid date format $date.

-30024 INVALID_MINDATEVALUE

Minimum date allowed is $date.

-30025 INVALID_MAXDATEVALUE

Maximum date allowed is $date.

-30026 INVALID_ENUMVALUE

Invalid boolean Value. Valid values are N->0,Y->1.

-30027 ERROR_INCONVERSION

Error in converting to integer $field.

-30028 INVALID_MINVALUE

Minimum value allowed is $field for $name.

-30029 INVALID_MAXVALUE

Maximum value allowed is $field for $name.

-30030 TOO_LONG

Maximum length of field $field is $length.



CLI Errors Alcatel


-30031 TOO_LESS

Length is short. Minimum length of field $field is $length.

-30032 INVALID_IPADDRESS

Invalid IP Address $field. It should be like [0..255].[0..255].[0..255].[0..255].

-30033 INVALID_PC

Invalid Point Code. It should be [0..255]-[0..255]-[0..255].

-30034 CLI_OPERATION_FAILED

Operation $operation Failed. $errorDesc.

-30035 CLI_FILE_READ_ERROR

Error in reading $file.

-30036 CLI_FILE_NOT_FOUND

File $file not found.

-30037 CLI_HELP_INVALID_PARAM

Invalid Parameters. Maximum two allowed.

-30038 UNKNOWN_PRIVILEGE

Unknown $prev Assignment .

-30039 CLI_INVALID_DATA_FIELD

Unsupported Command Field.

-30040 CLI_INVALID_DATA_VALUE

Unsupported Command Value.



Alcatel CLI Errors


-30041 CLI_INVALID_ENTITY

Unsupported Cli Entity.

-30042 CLI_UNABLE_TO_LOCATE_CORBAIMPL

Unable to locate corba impl.

-30043 CLI_UNSUPPORTED_OPERATION

Unsupported operation $operation.

-30044 CLI_INVALID_FID

Invalid fid for entity $entity.

-30045 UNKNOWN_COMMAND_EXEC

Unknown command received.

-30046 UNKNOWN_STARTSERVER_ERROR

Exception occurred at start of the CLI Server.

-30047 ERROR_INIT_CMDTREE

Exception occurred tring to initiliaze the Command Tree.

-30048 UNABLE_CLIENT_CONN

Unable to receive the client connection.



CLI Errors Alcatel


-30049 LOGIN_ERROR

Error occurred when logging in to the EMS server.

-30050 SESSIONMGR_ERROR

Error occurred when Session Manager is starting up.

-30051 INVALID_EVENTTYPE

Invalid Event Type received : $eventtype.

-30052 INVALID_GROUPID

Invalid Group id $groupId.

-30053 INVALIDDATA

Invalid Data found.

-30054 HISTORY_DATA_REQUIRED

For query history events, Query Current Data flag should not be checked.

-30055 INVALIDSEARCH

Invalid Search Criteria.

-30056 NOIDS

No IDs found for this MO.

-30057 NOTHING_TO_LOG

Nothing to log.

-30058 INVALID_SEARCH_VAL

Enter string patters seperated by comma.Use * as wildcard and put (-i) in front of the string for case insensitive matching.



Alcatel CLI Errors


-30059 INFO LOAD_COMPLETED

Executed Load Command.

-30060 CONTAINED_RES_LESS_THAN_MIN

Contained Resources are less than miminum allowed.

-30061 INFO NO_ACTIVE_TEST

No active test running that can be aborted.

-30062 CONTAINED_RES_MORE_THAN_MAX

Contained Resources are more than maximum allowed.

-30063 INFO TEST_ABORTED

Test aborted.

-30064 INVALID_FLDVALUE

Invalid value: $value.

-30065 CONFIRMSTRING

Are you sure Yes/Y/No/N.

-30066 NORECORDS_FOUND

Failed to retrieve any records with the specified criteria.

-30067 NOACTIVEUSERS

No active users found.

-30068 NOALIASFOUND

Alias not found.



CLI Errors Alcatel


-30069 NOALIASESFOUND

No aliases found.

-30070 NOCMDSFOUND

No commands found.

-30071 EVTHISTINPROCESS

Events History request is being processed Please wait..

-30072 HUGEAMTOFDATA

The amount of data is very huge. Cannot process the command in non interactive mode.

-30073 DONE_OPPARAMS

Completed Optional Parameters.

-30074 NO_OPPARAMS

No Optional Parameters for this Resource.

-30075 NO_DATASETRETRIEVE

No Data sets to retrieve.

-30076 PERF_INPROGRESS

Performance request is being processed Please wait.

-30077 INVALID_VALUE_FIELD

Invalid value for field.Valid values are $field.

-30078 DISPPOLL_STATUS

Polling Status : $field".



Alcatel CLI Errors


-30079 UNABLE_TO_CLEAR_ALARM

Unable to clear alarm(s).

-30080 UNABLE_TO_ACK_ALARM

Unable to acknowledge alarm(s).

-30081 UNABLE_TO_UNACK_ALARM

Unable to Unacknowledge alarm.

-30082 INVALID_ALARM_ID

Invalid alarm id : $field.

-30083 INVALID_HISTORY_REFERENCE

Invalid history reference.

-30084 INVALID_VALUE_FOR_HISTORY

Invalid value for $field. Valid values are for example OrigTrafSepIdx=val1; TermTrafSepIdx=val2 | OrigTrafSepIdx=val3,val4; TermTrafSepIdx=val2.

-30085 INVALID_VALUE_ON_DEMAND

Invalid value for $field. Valid values are for example OrigTrafSepIdx=val1; TermTrafSepIdx=val2.

-30086 EQUAL_DATES

Start and End Dates cannot be equal Start and End Dates cannot be equal.

-30087 UNEQUAL_PASSWORDS

Confirm password should be same as New Password.



CLI Errors Alcatel


-30088 INVALID_PASSWORD

Password has to be one of these values: 0-9,a-z,A-Z. Password has to be one of these values: 0-9,a-z,A-Z.

-30089 PASSWORD_MISMATCH

NewPassword is same as OldPassword. Password has to be one of these values: 0-9,a-z,A-Z.

-30090 CDRQUERY_INVALID_WILDCARD_SEARCH

Invalid wild card search for $field, * should be the last character. Invalid wild card search for $field, * should be the last character.""String field."

-30091 NOT_LOCKED

The Resource is unLocked. This Test cannot be performed under this context, when the resource is unlocked.

-30092 INVALID_ITU_PC

Invalid Point Code. It should be [0..7]-[0..255]-[0..7].

-30093 NO_CELL_CONFIGURED

No Cell Configured.

-30094 BEGIN_CELL_CHECK

Begining Cell Id sould be less than Ending Cell Id.

-30095 WRONG_CALEA_NAME

Name can not be ALL or having.

Date post:	18-Jul-2016
Category:	Documents
Upload:	rawatumed
View:	88 times
Download:	4 times

Command Line Interface Guide for WCS

Documents